RIMS Exploring Risk Appetite Risk Tolerance 0412

Risk Report
Introduction – 89
Risk and Capital Overview – 90 Credit Risk Management – 107
Key Risk Metrics – 90 Market Risk Management – 115
Overall Risk Assessment – 91 Operational Risk – 123
Risk Profile – 92 Liquidity Risk Management – 128
Risk and Capital Framework – 94 Business (Strategic) Risk Management – 133
Risk Management Principles and Reputational Risk Management – 133
Governance – 94 Insurance Specific Risk Management – 135
Risk Governance – 95 Risk Concentration and Risk
Risk Culture – 98 Diversification – 135
Risk Appetite and Capacity – 99 Risk and Capital Performance – 136
Risk and Capital Plan – 100 Capital and Leverage Ratio – 136
Stress testing – 102 Credit Risk Exposure – 153
Recovery and Resolution Planning – 104 Asset Quality – 171
Risk and Capital Management – 106 Trading Market Risk Exposures – 180
Capital Management – 106 Nontrading Market Risk Exposures – 185
Resource Limit Setting – 106 Operational Risk Exposure – 186
Risk Identification and Assessment – 107 Liquidity Risk Exposure – 187
89 Deutsche Bank Operating and Financial Review – 36 Internal Control over Financial Reporting – 257
Annual Report 2016 Outlook – 78 Information pursuant to Section – 315 (4)
Risk and Opportunities – 86 of the German Commercial Code and
Risk Report – 88 Explanatory Report – 261
► Introduction Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Compensation Report – 199 Sections 289a and 315 (5) of the German
Corporate Responsibility – 250 Commercial Code – 267
Employees – 252
Introduction
Disclosures in line with IFRS 7 and IAS 1 as well as IFRS 4
The following Risk Report provides qualitative and quantitative disclosures about credit, market and other risks in line
with the requirements of International Financial Reporting Standard 7 (IFRS 7) Financial Instruments: Disclosures, and
capital disclosures required by International Accounting Standard 1 (IAS 1) Presentation of Financial Statements, as
well as qualitative and quantitative disclosures about insurance risks in line with the requirements of International Fi-
nancial Reporting Standard 4 (IFRS 4) Insurance contracts. Information which forms part of and is incorporated by
reference into the financial statements of this report is marked by a bracket in the margins throughout this Risk Report.
Disclosures according to Pillar 3 of the Basel 3 Capital Framework

Most disclosures according to Pillar 3 of the Basel 3 Capital Framework, which are implemented in the European Union
by the CRR and supported by EBA Implementing Technical Standards, are published in our additional Pillar 3 report,
which can be found on our webpage. In cases where disclosures in this Risk Report also support Pillar 3 disclosure
requirements these are highlighted by references from the Pillar 3 Report into the Risk Report.
Disclosures according to principles and recommendations of the Enhanced

Disclosure Task Force (EDTF)
In 2012 the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force (“EDTF”) was established as a private sector initiative under the auspice
of the Financial Stability Board, with the primary objective to develop fundamental principles for enhanced risk disclo-
sures and to recommend improvements to existing risk disclosures. As a member of the EDTF we adhered to the
disclosure recommendations in this Risk Report and also partly in our additional Pillar 3 Report.
Deutsche Bank 1 – Management Report 90
Annual Report 2016
Risk and Capital Overview
Key Risk Metrics

The following selected key risk ratios and corresponding metrics form part of our holistic risk management across
individual risk types. The Common Equity Tier 1 Ratio (CET 1), Internal Capital Adequacy Ratio (ICA), Leverage Ratio
(LR), Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), and Stressed Net Liquidity Position (SNLP) serve as high level metrics and are
fully integrated across strategic planning, risk appetite framework, stress testing (except LCR), and recovery and reso-
lution planning practices, which are reviewed and approved by our Management Board at least annually. The CET 1,
LR, Leverage Exposure, LCR and Risk Weighted Assets ratios and metrics, which are regulatory defined, are based on
the fully loaded rules under the Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and
investment firms (Capital Requirements Regulation or “CRR”) and the Directive 2013/36/EU on access to the activity of
credit institutions and the prudential supervision of credit institutions and investment firms (Capital Requirements Di-
rective 4 or “CRD 4”). ICA, Economic Capital and SNLP are Deutsche Bank specific internal risk metrics in addition to
the above described regulatory metrics.
Common Equity Tier 1 Ratio Total Risk-Weighted Assets

31.12.2016 11.8 % 31.12.2016 € 357.5 bn
31.12.2015 11.1 % 31.12.2015 € 396.7 bn
Internal Capital Adequacy Ratio 1 Total Economic Capital

31.12.2016 162 % 31.12.2016 € 35.4 bn
31.12.2015 158 % 31.12.2015 € 38.4 bn
Leverage Ratio Leverage Exposure

31.12.2016 3.5 % 31.12.2016 € 1,348 bn
31.12.2015 3.5 % 31.12.2015 € 1,395 bn
Liquidity Coverage Ratio Stressed Net Liquidity Position (sNLP)

31.12.2016 128 % 31.12.2016 € 36.1 bn
31.12.2015 119 % 31.12.2015 € 45.5 bn
1 The definition of Capital Supply for the purpose of calculating the Internal Capital Adequacy ratio has been further aligned to CRR/CRD 4 rules in that, goodwill
and other intangible assets are now deducted from Capital Supply instead of being added to economic capital demand. More information is provided in section
“Internal Capital Adequacy”.
For further details please refer to sections “Risk Appetite and Capacity”, “Recovery and Resolution Planning”, “Stress
Testing”, “Risk Profile”, “Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process”, “Capital Instruments”, “Development of Reg-
ulatory Capital” (for phase-in and fully loaded CET 1 and Risk Weighted Assets figures), “Development of Risk
Weighted Assets”, “Leverage Ratio” (for phase-in and fully loaded Leverage Ratio), “Liquidity Coverage Ratio”, and
“Stress Testing and Scenario Analysis”.
► Risk and Capital Overview Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Employees – 252
Overall Risk Assessment

Key risk categories include 1) financial risks such as credit risk (including settlement and transfer risk), market risk
(trading, non-trading and traded default risk), liquidity risk, business risk (including tax and strategic risk), and 2) non-
financial risks (NFRs) including reputational risk and operational risk (with important sub-categories compliance risk,
legal risk, model risk, information security risks, fraud risks, and money laundering risks). We manage the identification,
assessment and mitigation of top and emerging risks through an internal governance process and the use of risk man-
agement tools and processes. Our approach to identification and impact assessment aims to ensure that we mitigate
the impact of these risks on our financial results, long-term strategic goals and reputation. Please refer to section "Risk
and Capital Management" for detailed information on the management of our material risks.
As part of our regular risk and cross-risk analysis, sensitivities of the key portfolio risks are reviewed using a bottom-up
risk assessment and through a top-down macro-economic and political scenario analysis. This two-pronged approach
allows us to capture not only risk drivers that have an impact across our risk inventories and business divisions but also
those that are relevant only to specific portfolios.
Political risks remained at a heightened level during the fourth quarter of 2016. Markets generally reacted positively
following the November 2016 US presidential election, as the USD appreciated and bond yields increased in anticipa-
tion of potential fiscal stimulus and higher economic growth, although emerging markets underperformed amid capital
outflows. In Italy, the ‘No’ vote in December on the constitutional reform referendum was widely expected by markets,
with near-term risks centered on the fragile banking system. Oil prices rebounded as OPEC agreed to implement pro-
duction cuts. We expect that political uncertainty will continue to dominate risks in the euro area in 2017, with elections
in several key European economies to occur against a backdrop of potentially tense Brexit negotiations following the
triggering of Article 50 of the Treaty on the European Union by the UK, which is expected to occur by end-March 2017.
A potential shift towards a more protectionist policy stance in the U.S. would put pressure on its key trading partners
including China and Mexico. Selected Emerging Markets face elevated political and security risks.
The assessment of the potential impacts of these risks is integrated into our group-wide stress tests which assess our
ability to absorb these events should they occur. The results of these tests showed that the currently available capital
and liquidity reserves, in combination with available mitigation measures, would allow us to absorb the impact of these
risks if they were to materialize in line with the tests’ parameters. Information about risk and capital positions for our
portfolios can be found in the “Risk and Capital Performance” section.
Consistent with prior years, 2016 continued to demonstrate the trend of increasing global regulation of the financial
services industry, which we view as likely to persist through the coming years. We are focused on identifying potential
political and regulatory changes and assessing the possible impact on our business model and processes.
The overall focus of Risk and Capital Management throughout 2016 was on maintaining our risk profile in line with our
risk strategy, increasing our capital base and supporting our strategic management initiatives with a focus on balance
sheet optimization. This approach is reflected across the different risk metrics summarized below.
Annual Report 2016
Risk Profile
The table below shows our overall risk position as measured by the economic capital usage calculated for credit, mar-
ket, operational and business risk for the dates specified. To determine our overall (economic capital) risk position, we
generally consider diversification benefits across risk types.
Overall risk position as measured by economic capital usage by risk type

2016 increase (decrease)
from 2015
in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 in € m. in %
Credit risk 13,105 13,685 (580) (4)
Market risk 14,593 17,436 (2,843) (16)
Trading market risk 4,229 4,557 (328) (7)
Nontrading market risk 10,364 12,878 (2,514) (20)
Operational risk 10,488 10,243 245 2
Business risk 5,098 5,931 (833) (14)
Diversification benefit 1 (7,846) (8,852) 1,006 (11)
Total economic capital usage 35,438 38,442 (3,004) (8)
1 Diversification benefit across credit, market, operational and strategic risk (largest part of business risk).
As of December 31, 2016, our economic capital usage amounted to € 35.4 billion, which was € 3.0 billion or 8 %, below
the € 38.4 billion economic capital usage as of December 31, 2015. The decrease was mainly driven by the sale of our
participation in Hua Xia Bank.
The economic capital usage for credit risk was € 580 million or 4 % lower as of December 31, 2016 compared to year-
end 2015 mainly due to a lower settlement risk component.
The economic capital usage for trading market risk decreased to € 4.2 billion as of December 31, 2016, compared to
€ 4.6 billion at year-end 2015. The decrease was primarily driven by reductions in exposures in the Non-Core Opera-
tions Unit, the sale of Abbey Life and lower levels of inventory in the securitization and corporate real estate business
areas. The nontrading market risk economic capital usage decreased by € 2.5 billion or 20 % compared to Decem-
ber 31, 2015, mainly driven by a considerable decrease in the investment risk from the sale of our participation in Hua
Xia Bank and due to lower structural foreign exchange risk exposure resulting from a reduced shareholders equity
position in foreign currency.
The operational risk economic capital usage totaled € 10.5 billion as of December 31, 2016, which is € 245 million or
2 % higher than the € 10.2 billion economic capital usage as of December 31, 2015. The increase was mainly driven by
legal operational risk losses including legal provisions and an increased operational risk loss profile of the industry as a
whole. This is reflected in the operational risk loss data that has given rise to the increased economic capital usage and
which is largely due to the outflows related to litigation, investigations and regulatory enforcement actions.
Our business risk economic capital methodology captures strategic risk, which also implicitly includes elements of non-
standard risks including refinancing and reputational risk, and a tax risk component. The business risk decreased by
€ 833 million compared to December 31, 2015, to € 5.1 billion as of December 31, 2016. This decrease reflected a
lower economic capital usage for the strategic risk component driven by an updated earnings outlook.
The inter-risk diversification effect of the economic capital usage across credit, market, operational and strategic risk
decreased by € 1.0 billion mainly due to overall lower economic capital usage.
Our mix of various business activities results in diverse risk taking by our business divisions. We also measure the key
risks inherent in their respective business models through the undiversified Total Economic Capital (EC) metric, which
mirrors each business division’s risk profile before taking into account cross-risk effects at the Group level.
► Risk and Capital Overview Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Employees – 252
Risk profile of our business divisions as measured by economic capital

Dec 31, 2016
Private, Consoli-
Corporate & Wealth and Deutsche Non-Core dation &
in € m. (unless Global Investment Commercial Asset Operations Adjustments Total
stated otherwise) Markets Banking Clients Management Postbank Unit and Other Total (in %)
Credit Risk 4,984 3,202 1,726 62 2,582 108 442 13,106 37
Market Risk 4,444 897 360 2,197 1,352 332 5,010 14,592 41
Operational Risk 6,567 1,763 833 561 604 160 0 10,488 30
Business Risk 4,582 171 32 100 0 245 (32) 5,098 14
Diversification
Benefit 1 (4,990) (1,018) (477) (441) (562) (110) (248) (7,846) (22)
Total EC 15,587 5,015 2,473 2,480 3,976 735 5,172 35,438 100
Total EC in % 44 14 7 7 11 2 15 100 N/M
N/M – Not meaningful
Dec 31, 20151

Private, Consoli-
in € m. (unless Global Investment Commercial Asset Operations Adjustments Total
stated otherwise) Markets Banking Clients Management Postbank Unit and Other Total (in %)
Credit Risk 4,838 3,899 1,678 90 2,601 537 42 13,685 36
Market Risk 4,971 819 2,564 2,095 1,611 899 4,478 17,437 45
Operational Risk 6,274 1,613 958 282 600 452 64 10,243 27
Business Risk 5,154 405 1 0 0 261 110 5,931 15
Diversification
Benefit 2 (5,123) (1,172) (964) (373) (647) (369) (204) (8,852) (23)
Total EC 16,113 5,564 4,237 2,094 4,165 1,780 4,490 38,442 100
Total EC in % 42 14 11 5 11 5 12 100 N/M
1 Amounts allocated to the business segments have been restated to reflect comparatives according to the structure as of December 31, 2016.
Global Markets (GM) risk profile is dominated by its trading in support of origination, structuring and market making
activities, which gives rise to market risk and credit risk. The share of the operational risk in GM’s risk profile reflects the
high loss profile in the industry and internal losses. The remainder of GM’s risk profile is derived from business risk
reflecting earnings volatility risk. The economic capital usage for market and business risk decreased in 2016 partly
offset by increased usage for operational risk. The decrease in economic capital usage for market risk is driven by
lower exposure to the traded default risk component and the sale of Abbey Life.
Corporate & Investment Banking’s (CIB) revenues are generated from various products with different risk profiles. The
vast majority of its risk relates to credit risk in the Trade Finance and Corporate Finance businesses, while other busi-
nesses attract low to no credit risk. The economic capital usage for credit risk decreased in 2016 mainly due to a lower
counterparty risk component. Market risk mainly results from modeling of client deposits and trading.
Private, Wealth & Commercial Clients’ (PW&CC) risk profile comprises credit risk from retail, small and medium-sized
enterprises (SMEs) lending and wealth management (WM) activities as well as nontrading market risk from investment
risk, modeling of client deposits and credit spread risk. The divestment of Hua Xia Bank resulted in a significant de-
crease in economic capital usage for nontrading market compared to the year-end 2015.
The main risk driver of Deutsche Asset Management’s (Deutsche AM) business are guarantees on investment funds,
which we report as nontrading market risk. Otherwise Deutsche AM’s advisory and commission focused business
attracts primarily operational risk. The economic capital usage for operational risk and business risk increased com-
pared to the year-end 2015.
Annual Report 2016
Postbank’s risk profile is mainly driven by lending and deposit business with retail and corporate customers attracting
credit risk, credit spread risks in the banking book covered under market risk and some operational risk.
The Non-Core Operations Unit (NCOU) portfolio included activities that were non-core to the Bank’s future strategy;
assets earmarked for de-risking; assets suitable for separation; assets with significant capital absorption but low returns;
and assets exposed to legal risks. NCOU’s risk profile covered risks across the entire range of our operations which
primarily comprised credit and market risks targeted where possible for accelerated de-risking. The economic capital
usage for market risk was lower compared to year-end 2015 mainly due to general wind-down of non-strategic assets.
Consolidation & Adjustments mainly comprises nontrading market risk for structural foreign exchange risk, pension risk
and equity compensation risk. The increase of economic capital usage for credit risk in 2016 was mainly due to chang-
es in business structure of the Bank.
Risk and Capital Framework
Risk Management Principles and Governance

The diversity of our business model requires us to identify, assess, measure, aggregate and manage our risks, and to
allocate our capital among our businesses. Risk and capital are managed via a framework of principles, organizational
structures and measurement and monitoring processes that are closely aligned with the activities of the divisions and
business units:
‒ Core risk management responsibilities are embedded in the Management Board and delegated to senior risk man-
agers and senior risk management committees responsible for execution and oversight.
‒ We operate a Three Lines of Defense (“3LoD”) risk management model. The 1st Line of Defense (“1st LoD”) are all
the business divisions and service providing infrastructure areas (Group Technology Operations and Corporate
Services) who are the "owners" of the risks. The 2nd Line of Defense (“2nd LoD”) are all the independent risk and
control infrastructure functions. The 3rd Line of Defense (“3rd LoD”) is Group Audit, which assures the effectiveness
of our controls. The 3LoD model and the underlying design principles apply to all levels of the organization i.e.
group-level, regions, countries, branches and legal entities. All 3LoD are independent of one another and accounta-
ble for maintaining structures that ensure adherence to the design principles at all levels.
‒ The risk strategy is approved by the Management Board on an annual basis and is defined based on the Group
Risk Appetite and the Strategic and Capital Plan in order to align risk, capital and performance targets.
‒ Cross-risk analysis reviews are conducted across the Group to validate that sound risk management practices and
a holistic awareness of risk exist.
‒ All material risk types, including credit risk, market risk, operational risk, liquidity risk, business risk and reputational
risk, are managed via risk management processes. Modeling and measurement approaches for quantifying risk and
capital demand are implemented across the material risk types. Reputational risk is implicitly covered in our eco-
nomic capital framework, primarily within operational and strategic risk. For more details, refer to section “Risk and
Capital Management” for the management process of our material risks.
‒ Monitoring, stress testing tools and escalation processes are in place for key capital and liquidity thresholds and
metrics.
‒ Systems, processes and policies are critical components of our risk management capability.
‒ Recovery planning provides the escalation path for crisis management governance and supplies senior manage-
ment with a set of actions designed to improve the capital and liquidity positions in a stress event.
‒ Resolution planning is the responsibility of our resolution authority, the Single Resolution Board. It provides a strate-
gy to manage Deutsche Bank in case of default. It is designed to prevent major disruptions to the financial system or
the wider economy through maintaining critical services.
► Risk and Capital Framework Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Employees – 252
Risk Governance
Our operations throughout the world are regulated and supervised by relevant authorities in each of the jurisdictions in
which we conduct business. Such regulation focuses on licensing, capital adequacy, liquidity, risk concentration, con-
duct of business as well as organizational and reporting requirements. The European Central Bank (the “ECB”) in
connection with the competent authorities of EU countries which joined the Single Supervisory Mechanism via the Joint
Supervisory Team act in cooperation as our primary supervisors to monitor our compliance with the German Banking
Act and other applicable laws and regulations as well as the CRR/CRD 4 framework and respective implementations
into German law.
European banking regulators assess our capacity to assume risk in several ways, which are described in more detail in
the section “Regulatory Capital” of this report.
Several layers of management provide cohesive risk governance:
‒ The Supervisory Board is informed regularly on our risk situation, risk management and risk controlling, as well as
on our reputation and material litigation cases. It has formed various committees to handle specific tasks.
‒ At the meetings of the Risk Committee, the Management Board reports on key risk portfolios, on risk strategy
and on matters of special importance due to the risks they entail. It also reports on loans requiring a Supervisory
Board resolution pursuant to law or the Articles of Association. The Risk Committee deliberates with the Man-
agement Board on issues of the aggregate risk position and the risk strategy and supports the Supervisory
Board in monitoring the implementation of this strategy.
‒ The Integrity Committee, among other matters, monitors the Management Board’s measures that promote the
company’s compliance with legal requirements, authorities’ regulations and the company’s own in-house poli-
cies. It also reviews the Bank’s Code of Business Conduct and Ethics, and, upon request, supports the Risk
Committee in monitoring and analyzing the Bank’s legal and reputational risks.
‒ The Audit Committee, among other matters, monitors the effectiveness of the risk management system, particu-
larly the internal control system and the internal audit system.
‒ The Management Board is responsible for managing Deutsche Bank Group in accordance with the law, the Articles
of Association and its Terms of Reference with the objective of creating sustainable value in the interest of the com-
pany, thus taking into consideration the interests of the shareholders, employees and other stakeholders. The Man-
agement Board is responsible for establishing a proper business organization, encompassing appropriate and
effective risk management. The Management Board established the Group Risk Committee (“GRC”) in April, 2016
as the central forum for review and decision on material risk topics, by merging the Capital and Risk Committee
(“CaR”) and the Risk Executive Committee (“Risk ExCo”). The GRC is supported by four sub-committees: the
Group Reputational Risk Committee (“GRRC”), the Non-Financial Risk Committee (“NFRC”), the Enterprise Risk
Committee (“ERC”), and the Liquidity Management Committee (“LMC”), the roles of which are described in more
detail below.
Annual Report 2016
Risk Management Governance Structure of the Deutsche Bank Group
Supervisory Board
Audit Committee Risk Committee Integrity Committee

Monitors the effectiveness of the risk Advises on overall risk appetite and/or Monitors compliance with legal
management system, particularly of the risk strategy and monitors strategy requirements, authorities‘ regulation and
internal control system and the internal implementation by the management. in-house policies. Precautionary monitoring
audit system. Discusses the risk strategy, key risk and strategic analysis of legal and
topics and portfolios. reputational risk.
Management Board
Overall Risk and Capital Management Supervision
Group Risk Committee

Evaluates and classifies risks, sets rules for risk
management, risk appetite planning & steering, and
monitors risks.
Enterprise Risk Committee Liquidity Management Non-Financial Risk Group Reputational

Oversight and decision-making on Committee Committee Risk Committee
financial risks and cross risks, Decides upon mitigating actions to Ensures oversight, governance and Ensures the oversight,
including definition & review of stress be taken during periods of coordination of non-financial risk governance and
tests, and management of group- anticipated or actual liquidity stress, management and establishes a coordination of the
wide risk patterns. or any relevant liquidity event cross-risk and holistic perspective of reputational risk
key non-financial risks management
The following functional committees are central to the management of risk at Deutsche Bank:
‒ The GRC has various duties and dedicated authority, including approval of key risk management principles or rec-
ommendation thereof to the Management Board for approval, recommendation of the Group Recovery Plan and the
Contingency Funding Plan to the Management Board for approval, recommendation of overarching risk appetite pa-
rameters and recovery triggers to the Management Board for approval, setting of risk limits for risk resources availa-
ble to the Business Divisions, and supporting the Management Board during group-wide Risk and Capital planning
processes. Further duties include review of high-level risk portfolios and risk exposure developments, review of in-
ternal and regulatory group-wide stress testing results and making recommendations of required actions and moni-
toring of the development of risk culture across the Group.
‒ The NFRC oversees, governs and coordinates the management of non-financial risks in Deutsche Bank Group and
establishes a cross-risk and holistic perspective of the key non-financial risks of the Group. It is tasked to define the
non-financial risk appetite framework, to monitor and control the non-financial risk operating model, including the
3LoD principles and interdependencies between business divisions and control functions and within control func-
tions.
‒ The GRRC is responsible for the oversight, governance and coordination of reputational risk management and
provides for an appropriate look-back and a lessons learnt process. It reviews and decides all reputational risk is-
sues escalated by the Regional Reputational Risk Committees (“RRRCs”) and RRRC decisions which have been
appealed by the Business Units. It provides guidance on Group-wide reputational risk matters, including communi-
cation of sensitive topics, to the appropriate levels of Deutsche Bank Group. The RRRCs which are sub-committees
of the GRRC, are responsible for the oversight, governance and coordination of the management of reputational risk
in the respective regions on behalf of the Management Board.
Employees – 252
‒ The ERC has been established as a successor of the Portfolio Risk Committee (“PRC”) with a mandate to focus on
enterprise-wide risk trends, events and cross-risk portfolios, bringing together risk experts from various risk disci-
plines. The ERC approves the annual country risk portfolio overviews, establishes product limits, reviews risk portfo-
lio concentrations across the Group, monitors group-wide stress tests used for managing the Group’s risk appetite,
and reviews topics with enterprise-wide risk implications like risk culture.
‒ The LMC decides upon mitigation actions to be taken during periods of anticipated or actual liquidity stress or any
relevant event. In that capacity, the committee is responsible for making a detailed assessment of the liquidity posi-
tion of the Bank, including the ability to fulfill all payment obligations under market related stress, idiosyncratic stress,
or a combination of both. The LMC is also responsible for overseeing the execution of liquidity countermeasures in a
timely manner and monitoring the liquidity position of the Bank on an ongoing basis, during the stress period.
Our Chief Risk Officer (“CRO”), who is a member of the Management Board, has Group-wide, supra-divisional respon-
sibility for the management of all credit, market and operational risks as well as for the comprehensive control of risk,
including liquidity risk, and continuing development of methods for risk measurement. In addition, the CRO is responsi-
ble for monitoring, analyzing and reporting risk on a comprehensive basis.
The CRO has direct management responsibility for various risk management functions which are established with the
mandate to:
‒ Foster consistency with the risk appetite set by the GRC within a framework established by the Management Board
and applied to Business Divisions;
‒ Determine and implement risk and capital management policies, procedures and methodologies that are appropri-
ate to the businesses within each division;
‒ Establish and approve risk limits;
‒ Conduct periodic portfolio reviews to keep the portfolio of risks within acceptable parameters; and
‒ Develop and implement risk and capital management infrastructures and systems that are appropriate for each
division.
In addition to the specialized risk management functions, our Enterprise Risk Management (ERM) function covers
overarching aspects of risk management. Its mandate is to provide an increased focus on holistic risk management
and cross-risk oversight to further enhance our risk portfolio steering. Key objectives are to:
‒ Drive key strategic cross-risk initiatives and establish greater cohesion between defining portfolio strategy and gov-
erning execution;
‒ Provide a strategic and forward-looking perspective on the key risk issues for discussion at senior levels within the
Bank (risk appetite, stress testing framework);
‒ Strengthen risk culture in the bank; and
‒ Foster the implementation of consistent risk management standards.
ERM also develops the Bank-wide risk management framework aimed at identifying and controlling risks across the
institution within the agreed risk appetite.
The specialized risk management functions and ERM have a reporting line to the CRO.
Our Finance, Risk and Group Audit functions operate independently of our Business Divisions. It is the responsibility of
the Finance and Risk departments to quantify and verify the risk that we assume. Group Audit as our 3rd Line of De-
fense, independently examines, evaluates and reports on the adequacy of both the design and effectiveness of the
systems of internal control including the risk management systems.
Annual Report 2016
The integration of the risk management of our subsidiary Deutsche Postbank AG is promoted through harmonized
processes for identifying, assessing, managing, monitoring, and communicating risk, the strategies and procedures for
determining and safe guarding risk-bearing capacity, and corresponding internal control procedures. Key features of
the joint governance are:
‒ Functional reporting lines from the Postbank Risk Management to Deutsche Bank Risk;
‒ Participation of voting members from Deutsche Bank from the respective risk functions in Postbank’s key risk com-
mittees and vice versa for selected key committees; and
‒ Alignment to key Group risk policies.
The key risk management committees of Postbank are:
‒ The Bank Risk Committee, which advises Postbank’s Management Board with respect to the determination of over-
all risk appetite and risk and capital allocation;
‒ The Credit Risk Committee, which is responsible for limit allocation and the definition of an appropriate limit frame-
work;
‒ The Market Risk Committee, which decides on limit allocations as well as strategic positioning of Postbank’s bank-
ing and trading book and the management of liquidity risk;
‒ The Operational Risk Management Committee, which defines the appropriate risk framework as well as the limit
allocation for the individual business areas; and
‒ The Model and Validation Risk Committee, which monitors validation of all rating systems and risk management
models.
The Chief Risk Officer of Postbank or senior risk managers of Deutsche Bank are voting members of the committees
listed above.
Risk Culture
We seek to promote a strong risk culture throughout our organization. Our aim is to help reinforce our resilience by
encouraging a holistic approach to the management of risk and return throughout our organization as well as the effec-
tive management of our risk, capital and reputational profile. We actively take risks in connection with our business and
as such the following principles underpin risk culture within our group:
‒ Risk is taken within a defined risk appetite;

‒ Every risk taken needs to be approved within the risk management framework;
‒ Risk taken needs to be adequately compensated; and
‒ Risk should be continuously monitored and managed.
Employees – 252
Employees at all levels are responsible for the management and escalation of risks. We expect employees to exhibit
behaviors that support a strong risk culture. To promote this our policies require that behavior assessment is incorpo-
rated into our performance assessment and compensation processes. We have communicated the following risk cul-
ture behaviors through various communication vehicles:
‒ Being fully responsible for our risks;

‒ Being rigorous, forward looking and comprehensive in the assessment of risk;
‒ Inviting, providing and respecting challenges;
‒ Trouble shooting collectively; and
‒ Placing Deutsche Bank and its reputation at the heart of all decisions.
To reinforce these expected behaviors and strengthen our risk culture, we conduct a number of group-wide activities.
Our Board members and senior management frequently communicate the importance of a strong risk culture to sup-
port a consistent tone from the top. To support these behaviors, in 2016, we ran an internal educational campaign
entitled “We’re all risk managers”, which included a video and intranet messages from Board members and other sen-
ior leaders.
The Red Flags process continues to provide a link between risk-related conduct and performance management. It
allows us to monitor adherence to certain risk-related policies and processes, whereby a breach leads to an appropri-
ately risk-weighted Red Flag. In 2016, the process was enhanced through the introduction of IT-enabled reporting.
Individual Red Flag results are considered in promotion, compensation and performance management decisions.
We have continued to develop our training curriculum to raise risk awareness. In 2016, we launched a revised Risk
Awareness course for all employees, which included new sections on reputational risk and risk appetite.
Risk Appetite and Capacity

Risk appetite expresses the aggregate level of risk that we are willing to assume within our risk capacity in order to
achieve our business objectives, as defined by a set of minimum quantitative metrics and qualitative statements. Risk
capacity is defined as the maximum level of risk we can assume before breaching regulatory constraints and our obli-
gations to stakeholders.
Risk appetite is an integral element in our business planning processes via our Risk Plan and Strategy, to promote the
appropriate alignment of risk, capital and performance targets, while at the same time considering risk capacity and
appetite constraints from both financial and non-financial risks. Compliance of the plan with our risk appetite and ca-
pacity is also tested under stressed market conditions. Top-down risk appetite serves as the limit for risk-taking for the
bottom-up planning from the business functions.
The Management Board reviews and approves our risk appetite and capacity on an annual basis, or more frequently in
the event of unexpected changes to the risk environment, with the aim of ensuring that they are consistent with our
Group’s strategy, business and regulatory environment and stakeholders’ requirements.
In order to determine our risk appetite and capacity, we set different group level triggers and thresholds on a forward
looking basis and define the escalation requirements for further action. We assign risk metrics that are sensitive to the
material risks to which we are exposed and which are able to function as key indicators of financial health. In addition to
that, we link our risk and recovery management governance framework with the risk appetite framework. In detail, we
assess a suite of metrics under stress (CRR/CRD 4 phase-in and fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (“CET 1”) ratio
and Leverage Ratio (“LR”), Internal Capital Adequacy (“ICA”) ratio, and Stressed Net Liquidity Position (“SNLP”)) within
the regularly performed benchmark and more severe group-wide stress tests.
Annual Report 2016
Reports relating to our risk profile as compared to our risk appetite and strategy and our monitoring thereof are pre-
sented regularly up to the Management Board. In the event that our desired risk appetite is breached under either
normal or stressed scenarios, a predefined escalation governance matrix is applied so these breaches are highlighted
to the respective committees. Amendments to the risk appetite and capacity must be approved by the Group Risk
Committee or the full Management Board, depending on their significance.
Risk and Capital Plan

Strategic and Capital Plan
We conduct annually an integrated strategic planning process which lays out the development of our future strategic
direction as a group and for our business areas/units. The strategic plan aims to create a holistic perspective on capital,
funding and risk under risk-return considerations. This process translates our long term strategic targets into measura-
ble short- to medium-term financial targets and enables intra-year performance monitoring and management. Thereby
we aim to identify growth options by considering the risks involved and the allocation of available capital resources to
drive sustainable performance. Risk-specific portfolio strategies complement this framework and allow for an in-depth
implementation of the risk strategy on portfolio level, addressing risk specifics including risk concentrations.
The strategic planning process consists of two phases: a top-down target setting and a bottom-up substantiation.
In a first phase – the top down target setting – our key targets for profit and loss (including revenues and costs), capital
supply, capital demand as well as leverage, funding and liquidity are discussed for the group and the key business
areas. In this process, the targets for the next five years are based on our global macro-economic outlook and the
expected regulatory framework. Subsequently, the targets are approved by the Management Board.
In a second phase, the top-down objectives are substantiated bottom-up by detailed business unit plans, which for the
first year consist of a month by month operative plan; year two is planned per quarter and years three to five are annual
plans. The proposed bottom-up plans are reviewed and challenged by Finance and Risk and are discussed individually
with the business heads. Thereby, the specifics of the business are considered and concrete targets decided in line
with our strategic direction. The bottom-up plans include targets for key legal entities to review local risk and capitaliza-
tion levels. Stress tests complement the strategic plan to also consider stressed market conditions.
The resulting Strategic and Capital Plan is presented to the Management Board for discussion and approval. The final
plan is presented to the Supervisory Board.
The Strategic and Capital Plan is designed to support our vision of being a leading client-centric global universal bank
and aims to ensure:
‒ Balanced risk adjusted performance across business areas and units;

‒ High risk management standards with focus on risk concentrations;
‒ Compliance with regulatory requirements;
‒ Strong capital and liquidity position; and
‒ Stable funding and liquidity strategy allowing for business planning within the liquidity risk appetite and regulatory
requirements.
Employees – 252
The Strategic and Capital Planning process allows us to:
‒ Set earnings and key risk and capital adequacy targets considering the bank’s strategic focus and business plans;
‒ Assess our risk-bearing capacity with regard to internal and external requirements (i.e., economic capital and regu-
latory capital); and
‒ Apply an appropriate stress test to assess the impact on capital demand, capital supply and liquidity.
The specific limits e.g. for regulatory capital demand, economic capital, and leverage exposures are derived from the
Strategic and Capital Plan to align risk, capital and performance targets at all relevant levels of the organization.
All externally communicated financial targets are monitored on an ongoing basis in appropriate management commit-
tees. Any projected shortfall from targets is discussed together with potential mitigating strategies to ensure that we
remain on track to achieve our targets. Amendments to the strategic and capital plan must be approved by the Man-
agement Board. Achieving our externally communicated solvency targets ensures that we also comply with the Group
Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process (“SREP”) requirements as articulated by our home supervisor. On De-
cember 8, 2016, Deutsche Bank was informed by the ECB of its decision regarding prudential minimum capital re-
quirements for 2017, following the results of the 2016 SREP. The decision requires Deutsche Bank to maintain a
phase-in CET 1 ratio of at least 9.51 % on a consolidated basis, beginning on January 1, 2017. This CET 1 capital
requirement comprises the Pillar 1 minimum capital requirement of 4.50 %, the Pillar 2 requirement (SREP Add-on) of
2.75 %, the phase-in capital conservation buffer of 1.25 %, the countercyclical buffer (currently 0.01 %) and the phase-
in G-SII buffer following Deutsche Bank's designation as a global systemically important institution (“G-SII”) of 1.00 %.
The new CET 1 capital requirement of 9.51 % for 2017 is lower than the CET 1 capital requirement of 10.76 %, which
was applicable to Deutsche Bank in 2016. Correspondingly, 2017 requirements for Deutsche Bank's Tier 1 capital ratio
are at 11.01 % and for its total capital ratio at 13.01 %. Also following the results of the 2016 SREP, the ECB communi-
cated to us an individual expectation to hold a further “Pillar 2” CET 1 capital add-on, commonly referred to as the
‘“Pillar 2” guidance’. The capital add-on pursuant to the “Pillar 2” guidance is separate from and in addition to the Pil-
lar 2 requirement. The ECB has stated that it expects banks to meet the “Pillar 2” guidance although it is not legally
binding, and failure to meet the “Pillar 2” guidance does not automatically trigger legal action.
Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process

The lnternal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (“ICAAP”) requires banks to identify and assess risks, maintain
sufficient capital to face these risks and apply appropriate risk-management techniques to maintain adequate capitali-
zation on an ongoing and forward-looking basis, i.e., internal capital supply to exceed internal capital demand (figures
are described in more detail in the section “Internal Capital Adequacy”).
At a Group level, we comply with lCAAP as required under Pillar 2 of Basel 3 and its local implementation in Germany,
the Minimum Requirements for Risk Management (MaRisk), through a Group-wide risk management and governance
framework, methodologies, processes and infrastructure.
In line with MaRisk and Basel requirements, the key instruments to help us maintain our adequate capitalization on an
ongoing and forward looking basis are:
‒ A strategic planning process which aligns risk strategy and appetite with commercial objectives;
‒ A continuous monitoring process against approved risk, leverage and capital targets set;
‒ Regular risk, leverage and capital reporting to management; and
‒ An economic capital and stress testing framework which also includes specific stress tests to underpin our recovery
monitoring processes.
Annual Report 2016
Stress testing
We have a strong commitment to stress testing performed on a regular basis in order to assess the impact of a severe
economic downturn on our risk profile and financial position. These exercises complement traditional risk measures
and represent an integral part of our strategic and capital planning process. Our stress testing framework comprises
regular Group-wide stress tests based on internally defined benchmark and more severe macroeconomic global down-
turn scenarios. We include all material risk types into our stress testing exercises. The time-horizon of internal stress
tests is generally one year and can be extended to multi-year, if required by the scenario assumptions. Our methodolo-
gies undergo regular scrutiny from Deutsche Bank’s internal validation team (Global Model Validation and Governance
- GMVG) whether they correctly capture the impact of a given stress scenario. These analyses are complemented by
portfolio- and country-specific stress tests as well as regulatory requirements, such as annual reverse stress tests and
additional stress tests requested by our regulators on group or legal entity level. Examples of regulatory stress tests
performed in 2016 are the EBA stress test at Group level and the CCAR stress test for the US entity. Moreover, capital
plan stress testing is performed to assess the viability of our capital plan in adverse circumstances and to demonstrate
a clear link between risk appetite, business strategy, capital plan and stress testing. An integrated procedure allows us
to assess the impact of ad-hoc scenarios that simulate potential imminent financial or geopolitical shocks.
The initial phase of our internal stress tests consists of defining a macroeconomic downturn scenario by ERM Risk
Research in cooperation with business specialists. ERM Risk Research monitors the political and economic develop-
ment around the world and maintains a macro-economic heat map that identifies potentially harmful scenarios. Based
on quantitative models and expert judgments, economic parameters such as foreign exchange rates, interest rates,
GDP growth or unemployment rates are set accordingly to reflect the impact on our business. The scenario parameters
are translated into specific risk drivers by subject matter experts in the risk units. Based on our internal models frame-
work for stress testing, the following major metrics are calculated under stress: risk-weighted assets, impacts on profit
and loss and economic capital by risk type. These results are aggregated at the Group level, and key metrics such as
the SNLP, the CET 1 ratio, ICA ratio and Leverage Ratio under stress are derived. Prior to the impact assessment the
scenarios are discussed and approved by the Enterprise Risk Committee (ERC) which also reviews the final stress
results. After comparing these results against our defined risk appetite, the ERC also discusses specific mitigation
actions to remediate the stress impact in alignment with the overall strategic and capital plan if certain limits are
breached. The results also feed into the recovery planning which is crucial for the recoverability of the Bank in times of
crisis. The outcome is presented to senior management up to the Management Board to raise awareness on the high-
est level as it provides key insights into specific business vulnerabilities and contributes to the overall risk profile as-
sessment of the bank. The group wide stress tests performed in 2016 indicated that the bank’s capitalization together
with available mitigation measures allow it to reach the internally set stress exit level being well above regulatory early
intervention levels. A reverse stress test is performed annually in order to challenge our business model to determine
the severity of scenarios that would cause us to become unviable. Such a reverse stress test is based on a hypothet-
ical macroeconomic scenario and idiosyncratic events and takes into account severe impacts of major risks on our
results. Comparing the hypothetical scenario that would be necessary to result in our non-viability according to the
reverse stress, to the current economic environment, we consider the probability of occurrence of such a hypothetical
macroeconomic scenario as extremely low. Given the extremely low probability of the reverse stress test scenario, we
do not believe that our business continuity is at risk.
Employees – 252
Stress Testing Framework of Deutsche Bank Group

Finance:
Capital plan
Senior
Management:
No action required
ERM Risk Risk Units: Risk Units: Central Function: Central Function:
Research: Parameter translation Calculation engines Calculation of Comparison against
Scenario definition aggregated impact risk appetite Senior
Research defines Scenario parameters Teams run risk- Calculation of Stress results are Management:
scenario with several are translated into specific calculation aggregated stress compared against Actions
risk parameters such risk-specific drivers engines to arrive at impact based on risk appetite and in
Strategic decision
as FX, interest rates, stressed results capital plan for case of breaches
on adequate risk
growth, etc. several metrics such mitigation actions
mitigation or
as RWA, CET1, etc. are considered
reduction from a
catalogue of pre-
determined
alternatives
Risk Reporting and Measurement Systems

Our risk data systems support regulatory reporting and external disclosures, as well as internal management reporting
for credit, market, operational (including legal risk), business, reputational, liquidity risk, model risk and compliance risk.
The risk infrastructure incorporates the relevant legal entities and business divisions and provides the basis for report-
ing on risk positions, capital adequacy and limit utilization to the relevant functions on a regular and ad-hoc basis. Es-
tablished units within Finance and Risk assume responsibility for measurement, analysis and reporting of risk while
promoting sufficient quality and integrity of risk-related data. Our risk management systems are reviewed by Group
Audit following a risk-based audit approach.
The main reports on risk and capital management that are used to provide the central governance bodies with infor-
mation relating to Group risk profile are the following:
‒ Risk and Capital Profile is presented monthly to the GRC and the Management Board and is subsequently submit-
ted to the Risk Committee of the Supervisory Board for information. It comprises an overview of the current risk,
capital and liquidity status of the Group, also incorporating information on regulatory capital and internal capital ade-
quacy.
‒ An overview of our capital, liquidity and funding is presented to the GRC by Group Capital Management and the
Group Treasurer every month. It comprises information on key metrics including CRR/CRD 4 Common Equity Tier 1
capital and the CRR/CRD 4 leverage ratio, as well as an overview of our current funding and liquidity status, the li-
quidity stress test results and contingency measures.
‒ Results of the group-wide macroeconomic stress tests that are performed twice per quarter and/or more frequently
are reported to and discussed at the ERC.
The above reports are complemented by a suite of other standard and ad-hoc management reports of Risk and Fi-
nance, which are presented to several different senior committees responsible for risk and capital management at
Group level.
Annual Report 2016
Recovery and Resolution Planning

The 2007/2008 financial crisis exposed banks and the broader financial market to unprecedented pressures. These
pressures led to certain banks seeking significant support from their governments and to large scale interventions by
central banks. The crisis also forced many financial institutions to significantly restructure their businesses and
strengthen their capital, liquidity and funding bases. This crisis revealed that many financial institutions were insuffi-
ciently prepared for a fast-evolving systemic crisis and thus were unable to act and respond in a way that would avoid
potential failure and prevent material adverse impacts on the financial system and ultimately the economy and society.
In response to the crisis, a number of jurisdictions (such as the member states of the European Union, including Ger-
many and the UK as well as the US) have enacted new regulations requiring banks or competent regulatory authorities,
to develop recovery and resolution plans. The Group recovery plan (‘Recovery Plan’) is updated and submitted to our
regulators at least annually to reflect changes in the business and the regulatory requirements.
The Recovery Plan prepares us to restore our financial strength and viability during an extreme stress situation. The
Recovery Plan’s more specific purpose is to outline how we can respond to a financial stress situation that would signif-
icantly impact our capital or liquidity position. Therefore it lays out a set of defined actions aimed to protect us, our
customers and the markets and prevent a potentially more costly resolution event. In line with regulatory guidance, we
have identified a wide range of recovery measures that will mitigate different types of stress scenarios. These scenari-
os originate from both idiosyncratic and market-wide events, which would lead to severe capital and liquidity impacts as
well as impacts on our performance and balance sheet. The Recovery Plan, including its corresponding policy, is in-
tended to enable us to effectively monitor, escalate, plan and execute recovery actions in the event of a crisis situation.
The Management Board determines when the Recovery Plan has to be invoked and which recovery measures are
deemed appropriate.
The Recovery Plan is designed to cover multiple regulations including those applicable to us in the European Union
(“EU”) under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (”BRRD”) (as implemented in Germany) and the Single
Resolution Mechanism Regulation (“SRM Regulation”) as well as other key jurisdictions. Furthermore, the plan incorpo-
rates feedback from extensive discussions with our supervisory authority and the EU College of Supervisors as well as
by the Crisis Management Group (“CMG”) formed by key home and host authorities.
We are also working closely with our resolution authority, the Single Resolution Board, to create a Group Resolution
Plan for Deutsche Bank as set out in the BRRD, the SRM and the German Recovery and Resolution Act (“Sanierungs-
und Abwicklungsgesetz” or “SAG”).
In addition, Title I of the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (“DFA”) and the implementing
regulations issued by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System and the Federal Deposit Insurance Cor-
poration (“FDIC”) require each bank holding company with assets of U.S.$ 50 billion or more, including Deutsche Bank
AG, to prepare and submit annually a plan for the orderly resolution of subsidiaries and operations in the event of future
material financial distress or failure (the “Title I US Resolution Plan”). For foreign-based covered companies including
us, the Title I US Resolution Plan only relates to subsidiaries, branches, agencies and businesses that are domiciled in
or conducted in whole or in material part in the United States. In addition, Deutsche Bank Trust Company Americas
(“DBTCA”), one of our insured depository institutions (“IDIs”) in the United States, became subject in 2014 to the
FDIC’s final rule. This rule requires IDIs with total assets of U.S.$ 50 billion or more to periodically submit a resolution
plan to the FDIC (the “IDI Plan” and, together with the Title I US Resolution Plan, the “US Resolution Plan”) under the
Federal Deposit Insurance Act (the “IDI Rule”). In 2014, we expanded our Title I US Resolution Plan to also be respon-
sive to the IDI Rule requirements. In accordance with regulatory requirements, Deutsche Bank filed its most recent US
Resolution and IDI plans in July 2015. In June 2016, Deutsche Bank received guidance from the Federal Reserve and
Employees – 252
the FDIC that the filing dates for our US Resolution Plan had been extended until July 2017. The core elements of our
2015 US Resolution Plan are Material Entities (“MEs”), Core Business Lines (“CBLs”), Critical Operations (“COs”) and,
for purposes of the IDI Plan, Critical Services. The 2015 US Resolution Plan lays out the resolution strategy for each
ME, defined as those entities significant to the activities of a CO or CBL and demonstrates how each ME, CBL and CO,
as applicable, can be resolved in a rapid and orderly manner and without systemic impact on U.S. financial stability.
The US Resolution Plan also discusses the strategy for continuing Critical Services in resolution. Key factors ad-
dressed in the US Resolution Plan include how to ensure:
‒ Continued access to services from other U.S. and non-U.S. legal entities as well as from third parties such as pay-
ment servicers, exchanges and key vendors;
‒ Availability of funding from both external and internal sources;
‒ Retention of key employees during resolution; and
‒ Efficient and coordinated close-out of cross-border contracts.
The 2015 US Resolution Plan was drafted in coordination with the U.S. businesses and infrastructure groups so that it
accurately reflects the business, critical infrastructure and key interconnections.
MREL and TLAC

Under the Single Resolution Mechanism (“SRM”) Regulation, the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (“BRRD”)
and the German Recovery and Resolution Act (Sanierungs- und Abwicklungsgesetz, “SAG”) banks in the European
Union (“EU”) are required to meet at all times a robust minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities
(“MREL”) which is determined on a case-by-case basis by the competent resolution authority. In addition, on November
9, 2015, the Financial Stability Board (“FSB”) published a standard that will require, when implemented as law, global
systemically important banks (“G-SIBs”) to meet a new firm-specific minimum requirement for total loss-absorbing
capacity (“TLAC”) starting on January 1, 2019. Both the TLAC and MREL requirements are specifically designed to
require banks to maintain a sufficient amount of instruments which are eligible to absorb losses in resolution with the
aim of ensuring that failing banks can be resolved without recourse to taxpayers’ money.
On 23 November 2016, the European Commission (“EC”) proposed a revision of the Capital Requirement Regulation
(“CRR”) to implement TLAC into EU legislation. In addition, it proposed amendments to the BRRD and the SRM Regu-
lation. Under the Commission’s CRR revision proposal, the loss absorbency regime for EU Global Systemically Im-
portant Institutions (“G-SIIs”) would be closely aligned with the international TLAC term sheet. The instruments which
qualify under TLAC are Common Equity Tier 1 instruments, Additional Tier 1 instruments, Tier 2 instruments and cer-
tain eligible unsecured liabilities. The TLAC term sheet introduces a minimum requirement of 16 percent of Risk
Weighted Assets (“RWAs”) or 6 percent of leverage exposure by 1 January 2019; and 18 percent of RWAs and 6.75
percent of leverage exposure by 2022. The resolution authority would be able to request a firm-specific add-on if
deemed necessary. For non-G-SIIs banks, the MREL would still be set on a case-by-case basis.
Furthermore, under the German Banking Act, as amended by the German Resolution Mechanism Act, which was
published in November 2015, senior bonds will rank junior to other senior liabilities, without constituting subordinated
debt, in insolvency proceedings opened on or after January 1, 2017.
Annual Report 2016
Risk and Capital Management
Capital Management
Our Treasury function manages solvency, capital adequacy and leverage ratios at Group level and locally in each
region. Treasury implements our capital strategy, which itself is developed by the Group Risk Committee and approved
by the Management Board, including issuance and repurchase of shares and capital instruments, hedging of capital
ratios against foreign exchange swings, limit setting for key financial resources, design of book equity allocation, and
regional capital planning. We are fully committed to maintaining our sound capitalization both from an economic and
regulatory perspective. We continuously monitor and adjust our overall capital demand and supply in an effort to
achieve an appropriate balance of the economic and regulatory considerations at all times and from all perspectives.
These perspectives include book equity based on IFRS accounting standards, regulatory and economic capital as well
as specific capital requirements from rating agencies.
Treasury manages the issuance and repurchase of capital instruments, namely Common Equity Tier 1, Additional
Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments. Treasury constantly monitors the market for liability management trades. Such
trades represent a countercyclical opportunity to create Common Equity Tier 1 capital by buying back our issuances
below par.
Our core currencies are Euro, US Dollar and Pound Sterling. Treasury manages the sensitivity of our capital ratios
against swings in core currencies. The capital invested into our foreign subsidiaries and branches in the other non-core
currencies is largely hedged against foreign exchange swings. Treasury determines which currencies are to be hedged,
develops suitable hedging strategies in close cooperation with Risk Management and finally executes these hedges.
In connection with MREL and TLAC requirements, we review our issuance portfolio of senior bonds to make them
eligible under bail-in rules. We intend to comply with potential requirements as they become effective.
Resource Limit Setting

Usage of key financial resources is influenced through the following governance processes and incentives.
Target resource capacities are reviewed in our annual strategic plan in line with our CET 1 and Leverage Ratio ambi-
tions. In a quarterly process, the Group Risk Committee approves divisional resource limits for Total Capital Demand
and leverage exposure that are based on the strategic plan but adjusted for market conditions and the short-term out-
look. Limits are enforced through a close monitoring process and an excess charging mechanism.
Overall regulatory capital requirements are driven by the higher of our CET 1 ratio (solvency) and leverage ratio (lever-
age) requirements. In terms of order for the internal capital allocation, solvency-based allocation comes first, then an
incremental leverage-driven allocation, if required. The allocation methodology utilizes a two step approach: Allocation
of Shareholders Equity is solvency-based first until the externally communicated target of a 12.5 % CET 1 solvency
ratio is met, and then incremental leverage capital is allocated based on pro-rata leverage exposure of divisions to
satisfy the externally communicated target of a 4.5 % leverage ratio, if required. The allocation thresholds are reviewed
as and when externally communicated targets for the CET 1 or leverage ratio are adjusted. In our performance meas-
urement, our methodology also applies different rates for the cost of equity for each of the business segments, reflect-
ing in a more differentiated way the earnings volatility of the individual business models. This enables improved
performance management and investment decisions.
► Risk and Capital Management Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Employees – 252
Regional capital plans covering the capital needs of our branches and subsidiaries across the globe are prepared on
an annual basis and presented to the Group Investment Committee. Most of our subsidiaries are subject to legal and
regulatory capital requirements. In developing, implementing and testing our capital and liquidity, we fully take such
legal and regulatory requirements into account.
Further, Treasury is represented on the Investment Committee of the largest Deutsche Bank pension fund which sets
the investment guidelines. This representation is intended to ensure that pension assets are aligned with pension liabili-
ties, thus protecting our capital base.
Risk Identification and Assessment

We face a variety of risks as a result of our business activities; these risks include credit risk, market risk, business risk,
liquidity risk, operational risk and reputational risk as described in the following sections below. Our risk identification
and assessment processes utilize our Three Lines of Defense operating model with the first line identifying the key
risks and the second line complementing and aggregating identified risks into our global risk type taxonomy and as-
sessing identified risks for their materiality. Operating processes are in place across the organization to capture rele-
vant measures and indicators. The core aim of all processes is to provide adequate transparency and understanding of
existing and emerging risk issues, and to ensure a holistic cross-risk perspective. We update the risk inventory at least
once a year or at other times if needed, by running a risk identification and materiality assessment process in line with
MaRisk.
To align with the Three Lines of Defense taxonomy, we categorize our material risks into financial risks and non-
financial risks effective January 1, 2016. Financial risks comprise credit risk (including settlement and transfer risks),
market risk (including non-trading, trading and traded default risk), liquidity risk and business (strategic) risk. Non-
financial risks comprise operational risks and reputational risks with compliance risk, legal risk, model risk and infor-
mation security risk captured in our operational risk framework. For all material risks common risk management stand-
ards apply including having a dedicated risk management function, defining a risk type specific risk appetite and the
decision on the amount of capital to be held.
Credit risk, market risk and operational risk attract regulatory capital. As part of our internal capital adequacy assess-
ment process, we calculate the amount of economic capital for credit, market, operational and business risk to cover
risks generated from our business activities taking into account diversification effects across those risk types. Further-
more, our economic capital framework embeds additional risks, e.g. reputational risk and refinancing risk, for which no
dedicated economic capital models exist. We exclude liquidity risk from economic capital.
Credit Risk Management

Credit Risk Framework
Credit risk arises from all transactions where actual, contingent or potential claims against any counterparty, borrower,
obligor or issuer (which we refer to collectively as “counterparties”) exist, including those claims that we plan to distrib-
ute. These transactions are typically part of our traditional nontrading lending activities (such as loans and contingent
liabilities). Additionally, traded bonds and debt securities form part of our direct trading activity with clients (such as
OTC derivatives like foreign exchange forwards and Forward Rate Agreements). Carrying values of equity investments
are also disclosed in our Credit Risk section. We manage the respective positions within our market risk and credit risk
frameworks.
Annual Report 2016
Based on the annual risk identification and materiality assessment, Credit Risk contains four material categories,
namely default risk, industry risk, country risk, and product risk.
‒ Default risk, the most significant element of credit risk, is the risk that counterparties fail to meet contractual obliga-
tions in relation to the claims described above;
‒ Industry risk is the risk of adverse developments in the operating environment for a specific industry segment lead-
ing to deterioration in the financial profile of counterparties operating in that segment and resulting in increased
credit risk across this portfolio of counterparties;
‒ Country risk is the risk that we may experience unexpected default or settlement risk and subsequent losses, in a
given country, due to a range of macro-economic or social events primarily affecting counterparties in that jurisdic-
tion including: a material deterioration of economic conditions, political and social upheaval, nationalization and ex-
propriation of assets, government repudiation of indebtedness, or disruptive currency depreciation or devaluation.
Country risk also includes transfer risk which arises when debtors are unable to meet their obligations owing to an
inability to transfer assets to non-residents due to direct sovereign intervention; and
‒ Product Risk captures product-specific credit risk of transactions that could arise with respect to specific borrowers
or group of borrowers. It takes into account whether obligations have a similar risk characteristics and market place
behaviors.
We measure, manage/mitigate and report/monitor our credit risk using the following philosophy and principles:
‒ Our credit risk management function is independent from our business divisions and in each of our divisions, credit
decision standards, processes and principles are consistently applied.
‒ A key principle of credit risk management is client credit due diligence. Our client selection is achieved in collabora-
tion with our business division counterparts who stand as a first line of defence.
‒ We aim to prevent undue concentration and tail-risks (large unexpected losses) by maintaining a diversified credit
portfolio. Client, industry, country and product-specific concentrations are assessed and managed against our risk
appetite.
‒ We maintain underwriting standards aiming to avoid large credit risk on a counterparty and portfolio level. In this
regard we assume unsecured cash positions and actively use hedging for risk mitigation purposes. Additionally, we
strive to secure our derivative portfolio through collateral agreements and may additionally hedge concentration
risks to further mitigate credit risks from underlying market movements.
‒ Every new credit facility and every extension or material change of an existing credit facility (such as its tenor, col-
lateral structure or major covenants) to any counterparty requires credit approval at the appropriate authority level.
We assign credit approval authorities to individuals according to their qualifications, experience and training, and we
review these periodically.
‒ We measure and consolidate all our credit exposures to each obligor across our consolidated Group on a global
basis, in line with regulatory requirements.
‒ We manage credit exposures on the basis of the “one obligor principle”, under which all facilities to a group of bor-
rowers which are linked to each other (i.e., by one entity holding a majority of the voting rights or capital of another)
are consolidated under one group.
‒ We have established within Credit Risk Management – where appropriate – specialized teams for deriving internal
client ratings, analyzing and approving transactions, monitoring the portfolio or covering workout clients.
Measuring Credit Risk

Credit risk is measured by credit rating, regulatory and internal capital demand and key credit metrics mentioned below.
The credit rating is an essential part of the Bank’s underwriting and credit process and builds the basis for risk appetite
determination on a counterparty and portfolio level, credit decision and transaction pricing as well the determination of
credit risk regulatory capital. Each counterparty must be rated and each rating has to be reviewed at least annually.
Ongoing monitoring of counterparties helps keep ratings up-to-date. There must be no credit limit without a credit rating.
For each credit rating the appropriate rating approach has to be applied and the derived credit rating has to be estab-
lished in the relevant systems. Different rating approaches have been established to best reflect the specific character-
istics of exposure classes, including central governments and central banks, institutions, corporates and retail.
Employees – 252
Counterparties in our non-homogenous portfolios are rated by our independent Credit Risk Management function.
Country risk related ratings are provided by ERM Risk Research.
Our rating analysis is based on a combination of qualitative and quantitative factors. When rating a counterparty we
apply in-house assessment methodologies, scorecards and our 21-grade rating scale for evaluating the credit-
worthiness of our counterparties.
Changes to existing credit models and introduction of new models are approved by the Regulatory Credit Risk Model
Committee (RCRMC) chaired by the Head of CRM, as well as by the Head of the Model Risk Function or delegate,
where appropriate before the methodologies are used for credit decisions and capital calculation for the first time or
before they are significantly changed. Proposals with high impact are recommended for approval to the Management
Board. Additionally, the Risk Committee of the Supervisory Board has to be informed regularly about all model changes
that have been brought to the attention of the Management Board. Regulatory approval may also be required. The
methodology validation is performed independently of model development by Global Model Validation and Governance.
The results of the regular validation processes as stipulated by internal policies have to be brought to the attention of
the RCRMF, even if the validation results do not lead to a change. The validation plan for rating methodologies is pre-
sented to RCRMF at the beginning of the calendar year and a status update is given on a quarterly basis.
For Postbank, responsibility for implementation, validation and monitoring of internal rating systems effectiveness is
with Postbank’s Group Risk Controlling function and overseen by the model and validation committee, chaired by
Postbank’s Head of Group Risk Controlling. An independent model risk and validation function has been established in
2016 in addition to the model risk development unit. All rating systems are subject to approval by Postbank’s Bank Risk
Committee chaired by the Chief Risk Officer. Effectiveness of rating systems and rating results are reported to the
Postbank Management Board on a regular basis. Joint governance is ensured via a cross committee membership of
Deutsche Bank senior managers joining Postbank committees and vice versa
We measure risk-weighted assets to determine the regulatory capital demand for credit risk using “advanced”, “founda-
tion” and “standard” approaches of which advanced and foundation are approved by our regulator.
The advanced Internal Ratings Based Approach (“IRBA”) is the most sophisticated approach available under the regu-
latory framework for credit risk and allows us to make use of our internal credit rating methodologies as well as internal
estimates of specific further risk parameters. These methods and parameters represent long-used key components of
the internal risk measurement and management process supporting the credit approval process, the economic capital
and expected loss calculation and the internal monitoring and reporting of credit risk. The relevant parameters include
the probability of default (“PD”), the loss given default (“LGD”) and the maturity (“M”) driving the regulatory risk-weight
and the credit conversion factor (“CCF”) as part of the regulatory exposure at default (“EAD”) estimation. For the ma-
jority of derivative counterparty exposures as well as securities financing transactions (“SFT”), we make use of the
internal model method (“IMM”) in accordance with CRR and SolvV to calculate EAD. For most of our internal rating
systems more than seven years of historical information is available to assess these parameters. Our internal rating
methodologies aim at point-in-time rather than a through-the-cycle rating.
We apply the foundation IRBA to the majority of our remaining foundation IRBA eligible credit portfolios at Postbank to
the extent these have not been newly assigned to the advanced IRBA during 2016. The foundation IRBA is an ap-
proach available under the regulatory framework for credit risk allowing institutions to make use of their internal rating
methodologies while using pre-defined regulatory values for all other risk parameters. Parameters subject to internal
estimates include the probability of default (“PD”) while the loss given default (“LGD”) and the credit conversion factor
(“CCF”) are defined in the regulatory framework.
We apply the standardized approach to a subset of our credit risk exposures. The standardized approach measures
credit risk either pursuant to fixed risk weights, which are predefined by the regulator, or through the application of
external ratings. We assign certain credit exposures permanently to the standardized approach in accordance with
Article 150 CRR. These are predominantly exposures to the Federal Republic of Germany and other German public
sector entities as well as exposures to central governments of other European Member States that meet the required
conditions. These exposures make up the majority of the exposures carried in the standardized approach and receive
Annual Report 2016
predominantly a risk weight of zero percent. For internal purposes, however, these exposures are subject to an internal
credit assessment and fully integrated in the risk management and economic capital processes.
In addition to the above described regulatory capital demand, we determine the internal capital demand for credit risk
via an economic capital model.
We calculate economic capital for the default risk, country risk and settlement risk as elements of credit risk. In line with
our economic capital framework, economic capital for credit risk is set at a level to absorb with a probability of 99.98 %
very severe aggregate unexpected losses within one year. Our economic capital for credit risk is derived from the loss
distribution of a portfolio via Monte Carlo Simulation of correlated rating migrations. The loss distribution is modeled in
two steps. First, individual credit exposures are specified based on parameters for the probability of default, exposure
at default and loss given default. In a second step, the probability of joint defaults is modeled through the introduction of
economic factors, which correspond to geographic regions and industries. The simulation of portfolio losses is then
performed by an internally developed model, which takes rating migration and maturity effects into account. Effects due
to wrong-way derivatives risk (i.e., the credit exposure of a derivative in the default case is higher than in nondefault
scenarios) are modeled by applying our own alpha factor when deriving the exposure at default for derivatives and
securities financing transactions under the CRR. We allocate expected losses and economic capital derived from loss
distributions down to transaction level to enable management on transaction, customer and business level.
Besides the credit rating the key credit risk metric we apply for managing our credit portfolio, including transaction
approval and the setting of risk appetite, we establish internal limits and credit exposures under these limits. Credit
limits set forth maximum credit exposures we are willing to assume over specified periods. In determining the credit
limit for a counterparty, we consider the counterparty’s credit quality by reference to our internal credit rating. Credit
limits and credit exposures are both measured on a gross and net basis where net is derived by deducting hedges and
certain collateral from respective gross figures. For derivatives, we look at current market values and the potential
future exposure over the lifetime of a transaction. We generally also take into consideration the Risk-Return character-
istics of individual transactions and portfolios. Risk-Return metrics explain the development of client revenues as well
as capital consumption. In this regard we also look at the client revenues with respect to the balance sheet consump-
tion.
Managing and Mitigation of Credit Risk

Managing Credit Risk on Counterparty Level
Credit-related counterparties are principally allocated to credit officers within credit teams which are aligned to types of
counterparty (such as financial institutions, corporates or private individuals) or economic area (i.e., emerging markets)
and dedicated rating analyst teams. The individual credit officers have the relevant expertise and experience to man-
age the credit risks associated with these counterparties and their associated credit related transactions. For retail
clients credit decision making and credit monitoring is highly automated for efficiency reasons. Credit Risk Manage-
ment has full oversight of the respective processes and tools used in the retail credit process. It is the responsibility of
each credit officer to undertake ongoing credit monitoring for their allocated portfolio of counterparties. We also have
procedures in place intended to identify at an early stage credit exposures for which there may be an increased risk of
loss.
In instances where we have identified counterparties where there is a concern that the credit quality has deteriorated or
appears likely to deteriorate to the point where they present a heightened risk of loss in default, the respective expo-
sure is generally placed on a “watch list”. We aim to identify counterparties that, on the basis of the application of our
risk management tools, demonstrate the likelihood of problems well in advance in order to effectively manage the credit
exposure and maximize the recovery. The objective of this early warning system is to address potential problems while
adequate options for action are still available. This early risk detection is a tenet of our credit culture and is intended to
ensure that greater attention is paid to such exposures.
Employees – 252
Credit limits are established by the Credit Risk Management function via the execution of assigned credit authorities.
This also applies to settlement risk that must fall within limits pre-approved by Credit Risk Management considering risk
appetite and in a manner that reflects expected settlement patterns for the subject counterparty. Credit approvals are
documented by the signing of the credit report by the respective credit authority holders and retained for future refer-
ence.
Credit authority is generally assigned to individuals as personal credit authority according to the individual’s profession-
al qualification and experience. All assigned credit authorities are reviewed on a periodic basis to help ensure that they
are commensurate to the individual performance of the authority holder.
Where an individual’s personal authority is insufficient to establish required credit limits, the transaction is referred to a
higher credit authority holder or where necessary to an appropriate credit committee. Where personal and committee
authorities are insufficient to establish appropriate limits, the case is referred to the Management Board for approval.
Mitigation of Credit Risk on Counterparty Level
In addition to determining counterparty credit quality and our risk appetite, we also use various credit risk mitigation
techniques to optimize credit exposure and reduce potential credit losses. Credit risk mitigants are applied in the follow-
ing forms:
‒ Comprehensive and enforceable credit documentation with adequate terms and conditions.
‒ Collateral held as security to reduce losses by increasing the recovery of obligations.
‒ Risk transfers, which shift the loss arising from the probability of default risk of an obligor to a third party including
hedging executed by our Credit Portfolio Strategies Group.
‒ Netting and collateral arrangements which reduce the credit exposure from derivatives and repo- and repo-style
transactions.
Collateral
We regularly agree on collateral to be received from or to be provided to customers in contracts that are subject to
credit risk. Collateral is security in the form of an asset or third-party obligation that serves to mitigate the inherent risk
of credit loss in an exposure, by either substituting the counterparty default risk or improving recoveries in the event of
a default. While collateral can be an alternative source of repayment, it generally does not replace the necessity of high
quality underwriting standards and a thorough assessment of the debt service ability of the counterparty.
We segregate collateral received into the following two types:
‒ Financial and other collateral, which enables us to recover all or part of the outstanding exposure by liquidating the
collateral asset provided, in cases where the counterparty is unable or unwilling to fulfill its primary obligations. Cash
collateral, securities (equity, bonds), collateral assignments of other claims or inventory, equipment (i.e., plant, ma-
chinery and aircraft) and real estate typically fall into this category.
‒ Guarantee collateral, which complements the counterparty’s ability to fulfill its obligation under the legal contract and
as such is provided by third parties. Letters of credit, insurance contracts, export credit insurance, guarantees, credit
derivatives and risk participations typically fall into this category.
Our processes seek to ensure that the collateral we accept for risk mitigation purposes is of high quality. This includes
seeking to have in place legally effective and enforceable documentation for realizable and measureable collateral
assets which are evaluated regularly by dedicated teams. The assessment of the suitability of collateral for a specific
transaction is part of the credit decision and must be undertaken in a conservative way, including collateral haircuts that
are applied. We have collateral type specific haircuts in place which are regularly reviewed and approved. In this regard,
we strive to avoid “wrong-way” risk characteristics where the counterparty’s risk is positively correlated with the risk of
deterioration in the collateral value. For guarantee collateral, the process for the analysis of the guarantor’s creditwor-
thiness is aligned to the credit assessment process for counterparties.
Annual Report 2016
Risk Transfers
Risk transfers to third parties form a key part of our overall risk management process and are executed in various
forms, including outright sales, single name and portfolio hedging, and securitizations. Risk transfers are conducted by
the respective business units and by our Credit Portfolio Strategies Group (CPSG), in accordance with specifically
approved mandates.
CPSG manages the residual credit risk of loans and lending-related commitments of the institutional and corporate
credit portfolio; the leveraged portfolio and the medium-sized German companies’ portfolio within our Corporate Divi-
sions of GM and CIB.
Acting as a central pricing reference, CPSG provides the respective GM and CIB Division businesses with an observed
or derived capital market rate for loan applications; however, the decision of whether or not the business can enter into
the credit risk remains exclusively with Credit Risk Management.
CPSG is concentrating on two primary objectives within the credit risk framework to enhance risk management disci-
pline, improve returns and use capital more efficiently:
‒ to reduce single-name credit risk concentrations within the credit portfolio and
‒ to manage credit exposures by utilizing techniques including loan sales, securitization via collateralized loan obliga-
tions, default insurance coverage and single-name and portfolio credit default swaps.
Netting and Collateral Arrangements for Derivatives and Securities Financing Transactions
Netting is applicable to both exchange traded derivatives and OTC derivatives. Netting is also applied to securities
financing transactions as far as documentation, structure and nature of the risk mitigation allow netting with the underly-
ing credit risk.
All exchange traded derivatives are cleared through central counterparties (“CCPs”), which interpose themselves be-
tween the trading entities by becoming the counterparty to each of the entities. Where available and to the extent
agreed with our counterparties, we also use CCP clearing for our OTC derivative transactions.
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (“DFA”) and related Commodity Futures Trading
Commission (“CFTC”) rules introduced in 2013 mandatory CCP clearing in the United States for certain standardized
OTC derivative transactions, including certain interest rate swaps and index credit default swaps. Additionally, the
CFTC adopted final rules in 2016 that require additional interest rate swaps to be cleared on a phased implementation
schedule ending in October 2018. The European Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 on OTC Derivatives, Central Counter-
parties and Trade Repositories (“EMIR”) and the Commission Delegated Regulations (EU) 2015/2205, (EU) 2015/592
and (EU) 2016/1178 based thereupon introduced mandatory CCP clearing in the EU clearing for certain standardized
OTC derivatives transactions. Mandatory CCP clearing in the EU began for certain interest rate derivatives on June 21,
2016 and for; certain additional interest rate derivatives on February 9, 2017. Article 4 (2) of EMIR authorizes compe-
tent authorities to exempt intragroup transactions from mandatory CCP clearing, provided certain requirements, such
as full consolidation of the intragroup transactions and the application of an appropriate centralized risk evaluation,
measurement and control procedure are met. The Bank successfully applied for the clearing exemption for most of its
regulatory-consolidated subsidiaries with intragroup derivatives, including e.g., Deutsche Bank Securities Inc. and
Deutsche Bank Luxembourg S.A. As of January 16, 2016, the Bank has obtained intragroup exemptions from the
EMIR clearing obligation for 71 bilateral intragroup relationships.
The rules and regulations of CCPs typically provide for the bilateral set off of all amounts payable on the same day and
in the same currency (“payment netting”) thereby reducing our settlement risk. Depending on the business model ap-
plied by the CCP, this payment netting applies either to all of our derivatives cleared by the CCP or at least to those
that form part of the same class of derivatives. Many CCP rules and regulations also provide for the termination, close-
out and netting of all cleared transactions upon the CCP’s default (“close-out netting”), which reduced our credit risk. In
our risk measurement and risk assessment processes we apply close-out netting only to the extent we have satisfied
ourselves of the legal validity and enforceability of the relevant CCP’s close-out netting provisions.
Employees – 252
In order to reduce the credit risk resulting from OTC derivative transactions, where CCP clearing is not available, we
regularly seek the execution of standard master agreements (such as master agreements for derivatives published by
the International Swaps and Derivatives Association, Inc. (ISDA) or the German Master Agreement for Financial Deriv-
ative Transactions) with our counterparts. A master agreement allows for the close-out netting of rights and obligations
arising under derivative transactions that have been entered into under such a master agreement upon the counterpar-
ty’s default, resulting in a single net claim owed by or to the counterparty. For parts of the derivatives business (e.g.,
foreign exchange transactions) we also enter into master agreements under which payment netting applies in respect
to transactions covered by such master agreements, reducing our settlement risk. In our risk measurement and risk
assessment processes we apply close-out netting only to the extent we have satisfied ourselves of the legal validity
and enforceability of the master agreement in all relevant jurisdictions.
Also, we enter into credit support annexes (“CSA”) to master agreements in order to further reduce our derivatives-
related credit risk. These annexes generally provide risk mitigation through periodic, usually daily, margining of the
covered exposure. The CSAs also provide for the right to terminate the related derivative transactions upon the coun-
terparty’s failure to honor a margin call. As with netting, when we believe the annex is enforceable, we reflect this in our
exposure measurement.
The DFA and CFTC rules there under, including CFTC rules § 23.504 and § 23.158, as well as EMIR and Commission
Delegated Regulation based thereupon, namely Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/2251 introduced the
mandatory use of master agreements and related CSAs, which must be executed prior to or contemporaneously with
entering into an uncleared OTC derivative transaction. Under U.S. margin rules adopted by U.S. prudential regulators
(the OCC, Federal Reserve, FDIC, Farm Credit Administration and FHFA) and the CFTC, we are required to post and
collect initial margin and variation margin for our derivatives exposures with other derivatives dealers, as well as with
our counterparties that (a) are “financial end users,” as that term is defined in the U.S. margin rules, and (b) have an
average daily aggregate notional amount of uncleared swaps, uncleared security-based swaps, foreign exchange
forwards and foreign exchange swaps exceeding U.S.$ 8 billion in June, July and August of the previous calendar year.
The U.S. margin rules additionally require us to post and collect variation margin for our derivatives with other financial
end user counterparties. These margin requirements are subject to a U.S.$ 50 million threshold for initial margin and a
zero threshold for variation margin, with a combined U.S.$ 500,000 minimum transfer amount. The U.S. margin re-
quirements have been in effect for large banks since September 2016, with additional variation margin requirements
having come into effect March 1, 2017 and additional initial margin requirements phased in on an annual basis from
September 2017 through September 2020. Under EMIR the CSA must provide for daily valuation and daily variation
margining based on a zero threshold and a maximum transfer amount of € 500,000. For large derivative exposures
exceeding € 8 billion, initial margin has to be posted as well. The variation margin requirements under EMIR apply as of
March 1, 2017; the initial margin requirements will be subject to a staged phase-in until September 1, 2020. Pursuant to
Article 11 (5) to (10) of EMIR competent authorities are authorized to exempt intragroup transactions from the margin-
ing obligation, provided certain requirements are met. While some of those requirements are the same as for the EMIR
clearing exemptions (see above), there are additional requirements such as the absence of any current or foreseen
practical or legal impediment to the prompt transfer of funds or repayment of liabilities between intragroup counterpar-
ties. The Bank plans to make use of this exemption.
Certain CSAs to master agreements provide for rating-dependent triggers, where additional collateral must be pledged
if a party’s rating is downgraded. We also enter into master agreements that provide for an additional termination event
upon a party’s rating downgrade. These downgrading provisions in CSAs and master agreements usually apply to both
parties but in some agreements may apply to us only. We analyze and monitor our potential contingent payment obli-
gations resulting from a rating downgrade in our stress testing approach for liquidity risk on an ongoing basis. For an
assessment of the quantitative impact of a downgrading of our credit rating please refer to table “Stress Testing Results”
in the section “Liquidity Risk”.
Annual Report 2016
Concentrations within Credit Risk Mitigation

Concentrations within credit risk mitigations taken may occur if a number of guarantors and credit derivative providers
with similar economic characteristics are engaged in comparable activities with changes in economic or industry condi-
tions affecting their ability to meet contractual obligations. We use a range of quantitative tools and metrics to monitor
our credit risk mitigating activities. These also include monitoring of potential concentrations within collateral types
supported by dedicated stress tests.
For more qualitative and quantitative details in relation to the application of credit risk mitigation and potential concen-
tration effects please refer to the section “Maximum Exposure to Credit Risk”.
Managing Credit Risk on Portfolio Level
On a portfolio level, significant concentrations of credit risk could result from having material exposures to a number of
counterparties with similar economic characteristics, or who are engaged in comparable activities, where these similari-
ties may cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be affected in the same manner by changes in economic
or industry conditions.
Our portfolio management framework supports a comprehensive assessment of concentrations within our credit risk
portfolio in order to keep concentrations within acceptable levels.
Industry Risk Management

To manage industry risk, we have grouped our corporate and financial institutions counterparties into various industry
sub-portfolios. For each of these sub-portfolios an “Industry Batch report” is prepared, usually on an annual basis. This
report highlights industry developments and risks to our credit portfolio, reviews concentration risks, analyses the
risk/reward profile of the portfolio and incorporates an economic downside stress test. Finally, this analysis is used to
define the credit strategies for the portfolio in question.
The Industry Batch reports have been presented to the CRM Portfolio Committee. In addition to these Industry Batch
reports, the development of the industry sub-portfolios is regularly monitored during the year and is compared with the
approved sub-portfolio strategies. Regular overviews have been prepared for the CRM Portfolio Committee to discuss
recent developments and to agree on actions where necessary.
Country Risk Management

Avoiding undue concentrations from a regional perspective is also an integral part of our credit risk management
framework. In order to achieve this, country risk limits are applied to Emerging Markets as well as selected Developed
Markets countries (based on internal country risk ratings). Emerging Markets are grouped into regions and for each
region, as well as for the Higher Risk Developed Markets, a “Country Batch report” is prepared, usually on an annual
basis. These reports assess key macroeconomic developments and outlook, review portfolio composition and concen-
tration risks and analyze the risk/reward profile of the portfolio. Based on this, limits and strategies are set for countries
and, where relevant, for the region as a whole. Country risk limits are approved by either our Management Board or by
our Enterprise Risk Committee, pursuant to delegated authority, and by the Management Board at Postbank for re-
spective portfolios.
In our Country Limit framework, limits are established for counterparty credit risk exposures in a given country to man-
age the aggregated credit risk subject to country-specific economic and political events. These limits include exposures
to entities incorporated locally as well as subsidiaries of foreign multinational corporations. Separate transfer risk limits
are established which apply to any cross-border exposures (credit and trading) with our clients in above countries. Also,
gap risk limits are set to control the risk of loss due to intra-country wrong-way risk exposure.
Employees – 252
Beyond credit risk, our Country Risk Framework comprises market risk in trading positions in emerging markets and is
set based on the P&L impact of potential stressed market events on these positions. Furthermore we take in considera-
tion treasury risk comprising capital positions and exposure of Deutsche Bank entities in above countries (Funding,
Margin or Guarantees) which are subject to limits given the transfer risk inherent in these cross-border positions.
Our country risk ratings represent a key tool in our management of country risk. They are established by the independ-
ent ERM Risk Research function within Deutsche Bank and include:
‒ Sovereign rating: A measure of the probability of the sovereign defaulting on its foreign or local currency obligations.
‒ Transfer risk rating: A measure of the probability of a “transfer risk event”, i.e., the risk that an otherwise solvent
debtor is unable to meet its obligations due to inability to obtain foreign currency or to transfer assets as a result of
direct sovereign intervention.
‒ Event risk rating: A measure of the probability of major disruptions in the market risk factors relating to a country
(interest rates, credit spreads, etc.). Event risks are measured as part of our event risk scenarios, as described in
the section “Market Risk Monitoring” of this report.
All sovereign and transfer risk ratings are reviewed, at least quarterly, by the Enterprise Risk Committee, although
more frequent reviews are undertaken when deemed necessary.
Product specific Risk Management

Complementary to our counterparty, industry and country risk approach, we focus on product specific risk concentra-
tions and selectively set limits where required for risk management purposes. Specific product limits are set in particu-
lar if a concentration of transactions of a specific type might lead to significant losses under certain cases. In this
respect, correlated losses might result from disruptions of the functioning of financial markets, significant moves in
market parameters to which the respective product is sensitive, macroeconomic default scenarios or other factors A
key focus is put on underwriting caps in CIB and GM. These caps limit the combined risk for transactions where we
underwrite commitments with the intention to sell down or distribute part of the risk to third parties. These commitments
include the undertaking to fund bank loans and to provide bridge loans for the issuance of public bonds. The risk is that
we may not be successful in the distribution of the facilities, meaning that we would have to hold more of the underlying
risk for longer periods of time than originally intended. These underwriting commitments are additionally exposed to
market risk in the form of widening credit spreads. We dynamically hedge this credit spread risk to be within the ap-
proved market risk limit framework.
Furthermore, in our PW&CC businesses, we apply product-specific strategies setting our risk appetite for sufficiently
homogeneous portfolios where tailored client analysis is secondary, such as the retail portfolios of mortgages, business
and consumer finance products. In Wealth Management, target levels are set for global concentrations along products
as well as based on type and liquidity of collateral.
Market Risk Management

Market Risk Framework
The vast majority of our businesses are subject to market risk, defined as the potential for change in the market value
of our trading and invested positions. Risk can arise from changes in interest rates, credit spreads, foreign exchange
rates, equity prices, commodity prices and other relevant parameters, such as market volatility and market implied
default probabilities.
Annual Report 2016
One of the primary objectives of Market Risk Management, a part of our independent Risk function, is to ensure that
our business units’ risk exposure is within the approved appetite commensurate with its defined strategy. To achieve
this objective, Market Risk Management works closely together with risk takers (“the business units”) and other control
and support groups.
We distinguish between three substantially different types of market risk:
‒ Trading market risk arises primarily through the market-making activities of the Global Markets Division. This in-
volves taking positions in debt, equity, foreign exchange, other securities and commodities as well as in equivalent
derivatives.
‒ Traded default risk arising from defaults and rating migrations relating to trading instruments.
‒ Nontrading market risk arises from market movements, primarily outside the activities of our trading units, in our
banking book and from off-balance sheet items. This includes interest rate risk, credit spread risk, investment risk
and foreign exchange risk as well as market risk arising from our pension schemes, guaranteed funds and equity
compensation. Nontrading market risk also includes risk from the modeling of client deposits as well as savings and
loan products.
Market Risk Management governance is designed and established to promote oversight of all market risks, effective
decision-making and timely escalation to senior management.
Market Risk Management defines and implements a framework to systematically identify, assess, monitor and report
our market risk. Market risk managers identify market risks through active portfolio analysis and engagement with the
business areas.
Market Risk Measurement

We aim to accurately measure all types of market risks by a comprehensive set of risk metrics reflecting economic and
regulatory requirements.
In accordance with economic and regulatory requirements, we measure market risks by several internally developed
key risk metrics and regulatory defined market risk approaches.
Trading Market Risk

Our primary mechanism to manage trading market risk is the application of our Risk Appetite framework of which the
limit framework is a key component. Our Management Board supported by Market Risk Management, sets group-wide
value-at-risk, economic capital and portfolio stress testing limits for market risk in the trading book. Market Risk Man-
agement allocates this overall appetite to our Corporate Divisions and individual business units within them based on
established and agreed business plans. We also have business aligned heads within Market Risk Management to
establish business limits, by allocating the limit down to individual portfolios or geographical regions.
Value-at-risk, economic capital and Portfolio Stress Testing limits are used for managing all types of market risk at an
overall portfolio level. As an additional and complementary tool for managing certain portfolios or risk types, Market
Risk Management performs risk analysis and business specific stress testing. Limits are also set on sensitivity and
concentration/liquidity, business-level stress testing and event risk scenarios.
Business units are responsible for adhering to the limits against which exposures are monitored and reported. The
market risk limits set by Market Risk Management are monitored on a daily, weekly and monthly basis.
Employees – 252
Internally developed Market Risk Models

Value-at-Risk (VaR)
VaR is a quantitative measure of the potential loss (in value) of Fair Value positions due to market movements that will
not be exceeded in a defined period of time and with a defined confidence level.
Our value-at-risk for the trading businesses is based on our own internal model. In October 1998, the German Banking
Supervisory Authority (now the BaFin) approved our internal model for calculating the regulatory market risk capital for
our general and specific market risks. Since then the model has been continually refined and approval has been main-
tained.
We calculate VaR using a 99 % confidence level and a one day holding period. This means we estimate there is a 1 in
100 chance that a mark-to-market loss from our trading positions will be at least as large as the reported VaR. For
regulatory purposes, which include the calculation of our capital requirements and risk-weighted assets, the holding
period is ten days.
We use one year of historical market data as input to calculate VaR. The calculation employs a Monte Carlo Simulation
technique, and we assume that changes in risk factors follow a well-defined distribution, e.g. normal or non-normal (t,
skew-t, Skew-Normal). To determine our aggregated VaR, we use observed correlations between the risk factors
during this one year period.
Our VaR model is designed to take into account a comprehensive set of risk factors across all asset classes. Key risk
factors are swap/government curves, index and issuer-specific credit curves, funding spreads, single equity and index
prices, foreign exchange rates, commodity prices as well as their implied volatilities. To help ensure completeness in
the risk coverage, second order risk factors, e.g. CDS index vs. constituent basis, money market basis, implied divi-
dends, option-adjusted spreads and precious metals lease rates are considered in the VaR calculation.
For each business unit a separate VaR is calculated for each risk type, e.g. interest rate risk, credit spread risk, equity
risk, foreign exchange risk and commodity risk. For each risk type this is achieved by deriving the sensitivities to the
relevant risk type and then simulating changes in the associated risk drivers. “Diversification effect” reflects the fact that
the total VaR on a given day will be lower than the sum of the VaR relating to the individual risk types. Simply adding
the VaR figures of the individual risk types to arrive at an aggregate VaR would imply the assumption that the losses in
all risk types occur simultaneously.
The model incorporates both linear and, especially for derivatives, nonlinear effects through a combination of sensitivi-
ty-based and revaluation approaches on grids.
The VaR measure enables us to apply a consistent measure across all of our trading businesses and products. It
allows a comparison of risk in different businesses, and also provides a means of aggregating and netting positions
within a portfolio to reflect correlations and offsets between different asset classes. Furthermore, it facilitates compari-
sons of our market risk both over time and against our daily trading results.
When using VaR estimates a number of considerations should be taken into account. These include:
‒ The use of historical market data may not be a good indicator of potential future events, particularly those that are
extreme in nature. This “backward-looking” limitation can cause VaR to understate risk (as in 2008), but can also
cause it to be overstated.
‒ Assumptions concerning the distribution of changes in risk factors, and the correlation between different risk factors,
may not hold true, particularly during market events that are extreme in nature. The one day holding period does not
fully capture the market risk arising during periods of illiquidity, when positions cannot be closed out or hedged with-
in one day.
Annual Report 2016
‒ VaR does not indicate the potential loss beyond the 99th quantile.
‒ Intra-day risk is not reflected in the end of day VaR calculation.
‒ There may be risks in the trading book that are partially or not captured by the VaR model.
We are committed to the ongoing development of our internal risk models, and we allocate substantial resources to
reviewing, validating and improving them. Additionally, we have further developed and improved our process of sys-
tematically capturing and evaluating risks currently not captured in our value-at-risk model. An assessment is made to
determine the level of materiality of these risks and material risks are prioritized for inclusion in our internal model.
Risks not in value-at-risk are monitored and assessed on a regular basis through our RNIV framework.
Stressed Value-at-Risk
Stressed Value-at-Risk calculates a stressed value-at-risk measure based on a one year period of significant market
stress. We calculate a stressed value-at-risk measure using a 99 % confidence level. The holding period is one day for
internal purposes and ten days for regulatory purposes. Our stressed value-at-risk calculation utilizes the same sys-
tems, trade information and processes as those used for the calculation of value-at-risk. The only difference is that
historical market data and observed correlations from a period of significant financial stress (i.e., characterized by high
volatilities) is used as an input for the Monte Carlo Simulation.
The time window selection process for the stressed value-at-risk calculation is based on the identification of a time
window characterized by high levels of volatility in the top value-at-risk contributors. The identified window is then fur-
ther validated by comparing the SVaR results to neighboring windows using the complete DB Group portfolio.
Incremental Risk Charge
Incremental Risk Charge captures default and credit migration risks for credit-sensitive positions in the trading book. It
applies to credit products over a one-year capital horizon at a 99.9 % confidence level, employing a constant position
approach. We use a Monte Carlo Simulation for calculating incremental risk charge as the 99.9 % quantile of the port-
folio loss distribution and for allocating contributory incremental risk charge to individual positions.
The model captures the default and migration risk in an accurate and consistent quantitative approach for all portfolios.
Important parameters for the incremental risk charge calculation are exposures, recovery rates, maturity ratings with
corresponding default and migration probabilities and parameters specifying issuer correlations.
Comprehensive Risk Measure
Comprehensive Risk Measure captures incremental risk for the correlation trading portfolio calculated using an internal
model subject to qualitative minimum requirements as well as stress testing requirements. The comprehensive risk
measure for the correlation trading portfolio is based on our own internal model.
We calculate the comprehensive risk measure based on a Monte Carlo Simulation technique to a 99.9 % confidence
level and a capital horizon of one year. Our model is applied to the eligible corporate correlation trading positions where
typical products include collateralized debt obligations, nth-to-default credit default swaps, and commonly traded index-
and single-name credit default swaps.
Trades subject to the comprehensive risk measure have to meet minimum liquidity standards to be eligible. The model
incorporates concentrations of the portfolio and nonlinear effects via a full revaluation approach.
For regulatory reporting purposes, the comprehensive risk measure represents the higher of the internal model spot
value at the reporting dates, their preceding 12-week average calculation, and the floor, where the floor is equal to 8 %
of the equivalent capital charge under the standardized approach securitization framework. Since the first quarter of
2016, the CRM RWA calculations include two regulatory-prescribed add-ons which cater for (a) stressing the implied
correlation within nth-to-default baskets and (b) any stress test loss in excess of the internal model spot value.
Employees – 252
Market Risk Standardized Approach

Market Risk Management monitors exposures and addresses risk issues and concentrations for certain exposures
under the specific Market Risk Standardized Approach (“MRSA”). We use the MRSA to determine the regulatory capi-
tal charge for the specific market risk of trading book securitizations which fall outside the scope of the regulatory corre-
lation trading portfolio.
We also use the MRSA to determine the regulatory capital charge for longevity risk as set out in CRR/CRD 4 regula-
tions. Longevity risk is the risk of adverse changes in life expectancies resulting in a loss in value on longevity linked
policies and transactions. For risk management purposes, stress testing and economic capital allocations are also
used to monitor and manage longevity risk. Furthermore, certain types of investment funds require a capital charge
under the MRSA. For risk management purposes, these positions are also included in our internal reporting framework.
Market Risk Stress Testing

Stress testing is a key risk management technique, which evaluates the potential effects of extreme market events and
extreme movements in individual risk factors. It is one of the core quantitative tools used to assess the market risk of
Deutsche Bank’s positions and complements VaR and Economic Capital. Market Risk Management performs several
types of stress testing to capture the variety of risks: Portfolio Stress Testing, individual specific stress tests, Event Risk
Scenarios, and also contributes to Group-wide stress testing.
Trading Market Risk Economic Capital (TMR EC)

Our trading market risk economic capital model - scaled Stressed VaR based EC (SVaR based EC) - comprises two
core components, the “common risk” component covering risk drivers across all businesses and the “business-specific
risk” component, which enriches the Common Risk via a suite of Business Specific Stress Tests (BSSTs). Both com-
ponents are calibrated to historically observed severe market shocks. Common risk is calculated using a scaled version
of the Regulatory SVaR framework while BSSTs is designed to capture more product/business-related bespoke risks
(e.g. complex basis risks) as well as higher order risks not captured in the common risk component.
Traded Default Risk Economic Capital (TDR EC)

TDR EC captures the relevant credit exposures across our trading and banking books. Trading book exposures are
monitored by MRM via single name concentration and portfolio thresholds which are set based upon rating, size and
liquidity. Single name concentration risk thresholds are set for two key metrics: Default Exposure, i.e., the P&L impact
of an instantaneous default at the current recovery rate (RR), and bond equivalent Market Value (MV), i.e. default
exposure at 0 % recovery. In order to capture diversification and concentration effects we perform a joint calculation for
traded default risk economic capital and credit risk economic capital. Important parameters for the calculation of traded
default risk are exposures, recovery rates and default probabilities as well as maturities. The probability of joint rating
downgrades and defaults is determined by the default and rating correlations of the portfolio model. These correlations
are specified through systematic factors that represent countries, geographical regions and industries.
Trading Market Risk Reporting

Market Risk Management reporting creates transparency on the risk profile and facilitates the understanding of core
market risk drivers to all levels of the organization. The Management Board and Senior Governance Committees re-
ceive regular reporting, as well as ad hoc reporting as required, on market risk, regulatory capital and stress testing.
Senior Risk Committees receive risk information at a number of frequencies, including weekly or monthly.
Additionally, Market Risk Management produces daily and weekly Market Risk specific reports and daily limit excess
reports for each asset class.
Annual Report 2016
Regulatory prudent valuation of assets carried at fair value

Pursuant to Article 34 CRR institutions shall apply the prudent valuation requirements of Article 105 CRR to all assets
measured at fair value and shall deduct from CET 1 capital the amount of any additional value adjustments necessary.
We determined the amount of the additional value adjustments based on the methodology defined in the Commission
Delegated Regulation (EU) 2016/101.
At December 31, 2016 the amount of the additional value adjustments was € 1.4 billion.
Based on Article 159 CRR the total amount of general and specific credit risk adjustments and additional value adjust-
ments for exposures that are treated under the Internal Ratings Based Approach for credit risk and that are in scope of
the expected loss calculation may be subtracted from the total expected loss amount related to these exposures. Any
remaining positive difference must be deducted from CET 1 capital pursuant to Article 36 (1) lit. d. CRR.
At December 31, 2016 the reduction of the expected loss from subtracting the additional value adjustments was
€ 0.5 billion, which partly mitigated the negative impact of the additional value adjustments on our CET 1 capital.
Nontrading Market Risk

Nontrading market risk arises primarily from outside the activities of our trading units, in our banking book and from
certain off-balance sheet items. Significant market risk factors the Bank is exposed to and are overseen by risk man-
agement groups in that area are:
‒ Interest rate risk (including risk from embedded optionality and changes in behavioral patterns for certain product
types), credit spread risk, foreign exchange risk, equity risk (including investments in public and private equity as
well as real estate, infrastructure and fund assets).
‒ Market risks from off-balance sheet items such as pension schemes and guarantees as well as structural foreign
exchange risk and equity compensation risk.
Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book
Interest rate risk in the banking book is the current or prospective risk, to both the Bank's capital and earnings, arising
from adverse movements in interest rates, which affect the Bank's banking book exposures. This includes gap risk,
which arises from the term structure of banking book instruments, basis risk, which describes the impact of relative
changes in interest rates for financial instruments that are priced using different interest rate curves, as well as option
risk, which arises from option derivative positions or from optional elements embedded in the Bank’s on- and off-
balance sheet items.
The Bank measures the impact of interest rate risk in the banking book on the Bank’s economic value as well as on the
Bank’s earnings. Our Group Treasury division is mandated to manage on a fiduciary basis the interest rate risk central-
ly, with Market Risk Management acting as an independent oversight function.
The Bank employs mitigation techniques to immunize the economic value interest rate risk arising from nontrading
positions. The majority of our interest rate risk arising from nontrading asset and liability positions, with the exception of
some entities and portfolios, has been transferred through internal transactions to Treasury Pool Management, subject
to banking book value at risk limits. Treasury Pool Management hedges the transferred net banking book risk with
Global Markets trading books. Global Markets interest rate risk is managed on the basis of trading book value-at-risk,
as reflected in trading portfolio figures. The treatment of interest rate risk in our trading portfolios and the application of
the value-at-risk model is discussed in the “Trading Market Risk” section of this document.
Employees – 252
The most notable exceptions from the aforementioned paragraph are in Postbank and some PW&CC entities. These
entities manage interest rate risk separately through their entity specific Asset and Liability Management departments.
In addition, the Group holds selected economic value risk positions managed by Treasury, predominately to mitigate
earnings volatility.
The measurement and reporting of economic value interest rate risk is performed daily, earnings risk is monitored on a
monthly basis.
The following table shows the variation of the economic value for our banking book positions resulting from upward and
downward interest rate shocks by currency. In total, the estimated change in the economic value resulting from the
impact of the regulatory required parallel yield curve shifts of (200) and +200 basis points (floored by a rate of zero)
would be € (0.4) billion and € (0.3) billion, respectively, at December 31, 2016.
Economic value interest rate risk in the banking book by currency

Dec 31, 2016
in € bn. -200 bp1 +200 bp
EUR (0.5) (0.1)
GBP 0 (0.1)
USD 0.2 (0.2)
JPY 0 0
Other 0 0
Total (0.4) (0.3)
1
Floored at zero
A sudden parallel increase in yield curves would positively impact our earnings (net interest income) from our banking
book positions. We estimate that the total one-year net interest income change resulting from parallel yield curve shifts
of (200) and +200 basis points (floored by a rate of zero) would be € (0.6) billion and € 2.1 billion, respectively, at De-
cember 31, 2016.
Our PW&CC and CIB businesses are subject to risk of changes in our clients’ behavior with regard to their deposits as
well as loan products. A main component of the economic value of our banking book positions is the maturity transfor-
mation of contractually short term deposits. The effective duration of contractually short term deposits is based upon
observable client behavior, elasticity of deposit rates to market interest rates (“DRE”) and the volatility of deposit bal-
ances. Additionally, we consider early prepayment behavior of our customers for loan products. The parameters are
based on historical observations, statistical analyses and expert assessments. If the future evolution of balances, rates
or client behavior differs from these assumptions, then this could have an impact on our interest rate risks in the bank-
ing book.
Credit Spread Risk in the Banking Book
Deutsche Bank is exposed to credit spread risk of bonds held in the banking book. This risk category is closely associ-
ated with interest rate risk in the banking book as basis risk describing the impact of relative changes in interest rates
for financial instruments that are priced using product specific curves. Within nontrading market risk the basis between
a product specific bond curve and a risk free interest rate curve is represented under the category credit spread risk in
the banking book.
Foreign Exchange Risk
Foreign exchange risk arises from our nontrading asset and liability positions, denominated in currencies other than the
functional currency of the respective entity. The majority of this foreign exchange risk is transferred through internal
hedges to trading books within Global Markets and is therefore reflected and managed via the value-at-risk figures in
the trading books. The remaining foreign exchange risks that have not been transferred are mitigated through match
funding the investment in the same currency, therefore only residual risk remains in the portfolios. Small exceptions to
above approach follow the general MRM monitoring and reporting process, as outlined for the trading portfolio.
Annual Report 2016
The bulk of nontrading foreign exchange risk is related to unhedged structural foreign exchange exposure, mainly in
our U.S., U.K. and China entities. Structural foreign exchange exposure arises from local capital (including retained
earnings) held in the Bank’s consolidated subsidiaries and branches and from investments accounted for at equity.
Change in foreign exchange rates of the underlying functional currencies result in revaluation of capital and retained
earnings and are recognized in other comprehensive income booked as Currency Translation Adjustments (“CTA”).
The primary objective for managing our structural foreign exchange exposure is to stabilize consolidated capital ratios
from the effects of fluctuations in exchange rates. Therefore the exposure remains unhedged for a number of core
currencies with considerable amounts of risk-weighted assets denominated in that currency in order to avoid volatility in
the capital ratio for the specific entity and the Group as a whole.
Investment Risk
Nontrading market risk from investment exposure is predominantly the equity risk arising from our non-consolidated
investment holdings in the banking book categorized into strategic and alternative investment assets.
Strategic investments typically relate to acquisitions made to support our business franchise and are undertaken with a
medium to long-term investment horizon. Alternative assets are comprised of principal investments and other non-
strategic investment assets. Principal investments are direct investments in private equity (including leveraged buy-out
fund commitments and equity bridge commitments), real estate (including mezzanine debt) and venture capital, under-
taken for capital appreciation. In addition, principal investments are made in hedge funds and mutual funds in order to
establish a track record for sale to external clients. Other non-strategic investment assets comprise assets recovered in
the workout of distressed positions or other legacy investment assets in private equity and real estate of a non-strategic
nature.
Pension Risk
We are exposed to market risk from a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The
ability of the pension schemes to meet the projected pension payments, is maintained through investments and ongo-
ing plan contributions. Market risk materializes due to a potential decline in the market value of the assets or an in-
crease in the liability of each of the pension plans. Market Risk Management monitors and reports all market risks both
on the asset and liability side of our defined benefit pension plans including interest rate risk, inflation risk, credit spread
risk, equity risk and longevity risk. For details on our defined benefit pension obligation see additional Note 36 “Em-
ployee Benefits”.
Other Risks
In addition to the above risks, Market Risk Management has the mandate to monitor and manage market risks that
arise from capital, funding and liquidity risk management activities of our Treasury department. Besides the structural
foreign exchange capital hedging process, this includes market risks arising from our equity compensation plans.
Market risks in our asset management activities in Deutsche AM, primarily results from principal guaranteed funds or
accounts, but also from co-investments in our funds.
Nontrading market risk measurement.

Non-trading market risk economic capital is being calculated either by applying the standard traded market risk EC
methodology (SVaR based EC model) or through the use of non-traded market risk models that are specific to each
risk class and which consider, among other factors, large historically observed market moves, the liquidity of each
asset class, and changes in client’s behavior in relation to products with behavioral optionalities.
Employees – 252
Operational Risk Management

Operational Risk Framework
Operational Risk means the risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or
from external events, and includes legal risk. Operational risk excludes business and reputational risk.
Group Operational Risk Management (“Group ORM”) has the responsibility for the design, implementation and mainte-
nance of the Operational Risk Management Framework (“ORMF”) including the associated governance structures.
Group ORM also has the responsibility for providing a cross-risk assessment and aggregation of risks to provide a
holistic portfolio view of the non-financial risk profile of the Bank, which includes oversight of risk and control mitigation
plans to return risk within risk appetite, where required.
We take decisions to manage operational risks, both strategically as well as in day-to-day business. Four principles
form the foundation of the Operational Risk Management Framework (“ORMF”) at Deutsche Bank:
Operational Risk Principle I: Risk owners have full accountability for their operational risks and have to manage against
a defined risk specific appetite. Risk owners are defined to be: First Line of Defence (“LoD”) (GM, CIB, Deutsche AM,
PW&CC, NCOU and first LoD Infrastructure Functions), for all of their operational risks, and second LoD control func-
tions (Infrastructure Functions), for the operational risks that arise in their own activities and processes.
Risk owners are accountable for managing all operational risks in their business/processes with an end-to-end process
view, within a defined operational risk specific appetite and for identifying, establishing and maintaining risk owner (i.e.
Level 1) controls. In addition they mitigate identified and assessed risk within the risk specific appetite through remedia-
tion actions, insurance or by ceasing/reducing business activities.
Divisional Control Officers, or the equivalent in infrastructure functions, support the risk owners. They are responsible
for embedding the ORMF within the relevant business division or infrastructure function. They assess the effectiveness
of the Level 1 Controls, monitor the aggregated risk profile and put the appropriate control and mitigating actions in
place within the relevant division. The Divisional Control Officers also establish appropriate governance forums to
oversee the operational risk profile and are involved in decision making processes.
Operational Risk Principle II: Risk Type Controllers are independent second LoD control functions that control specific
risk types as identified in the Operational Risk Type Taxonomy.
Risk Type Controllers are responsible for establishing an effective risk management framework for the risk type they
control. They define risk type taxonomy and minimum control standards and set the risk specific appetite. Risk Type
Controllers challenge, assess and report the risks in their remit and perform Level 2 Controls, complementary to the
Level 1 Controls. Finally they establish independent operational risk governance, and prepare aggregated reporting
into the Group Non-Financial Risk Committee.
Operational Risk Principle III: Group ORM establishes and maintains the Group Operational Risk Management
Framework. Group ORM develops and maintains the Group's framework, defining the roles and responsibilities for the
management of operational risk across the Bank and the process to identify, assess, mitigate, monitor, report and
escalate operational risks. Group ORM also maintains the operational risk type taxonomy and oversees the complete-
ness of coverage of risk types identified in the taxonomy by second LoD control functions, in line with the Group wide
risk taxonomy standards. It also provides the tools for, and monitors execution and results of, the Group’s Risk and
Control Assessment process.
Annual Report 2016
Group ORM also provides independent challenge of the Group’s operational risk profile providing independent risk
views to facilitate forward looking management of the risks. The function independently reviews, monitors and assess-
es material risks and key controls at a divisional and infrastructure level across the Bank. It further monitors and reports
on the Group's operational risk profile in comparison to the Group Risk Appetite, to systematically identify operational
risk themes and concentrations, and to oversee that risk mitigating measures and priorities have been agreed. Group
ORM establishes reporting and escalating procedures up to the Management Board for risk assessment results and
identified material control gaps, while informing Group Audit of material control gaps.
Operational Risk Principle IV: Group Operational Risk Management aims to maintain sufficient capital to underpin
operational risk. Group ORM is accountable for the design, implementation and maintenance of an appropriate ap-
proach to determine a sufficient level of capital demand for operational risk for recommendation to the Management
Board. To fulfill this requirement Group ORM is accountable for the calculation and allocation of operational risk capital
demand and Expected Loss planning under the Advanced Measurement Approach (“AMA”). Group ORM is also ac-
countable for the facilitation of the annual operational risk capital planning and monthly review process.
Organizational & Governance Structure

Group Operational Risk Management is part of the Group Risk function which is headed by the Chief Risk Officer. The
Chief Risk Officer appoints the Head of Group Operational Risk Management.
Within Group ORM the Head of Group Operational Risk Management is accountable for the design, implementation
and maintenance of an effective and efficient Group ORMF, including the operational risk capital model.
The Non-Financial Risk Committee, which is co-chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and the Chief Regulatory Officer, is
responsible for the oversight, governance and coordination of the management of operational risk in the Group on
behalf of the Management Board by establishing a cross-risk and holistic perspective of the key operational risks of the
Group. Its decision-making and policy related authorities include the review, advice and management of all operational
risk issues which may impact the risk profile of our business divisions and infrastructure functions.
The Head of Group Operational Risk Management is fully accountable for the setup and maintenance of the ORMF,
including the adherence to all applicable legal and regulatory requirements. He is the owner of the Group’s operational
risk capital model and oversees its ongoing development as well as the capital calculation process. As the Model Own-
er, he manages relevant model risks and sets up appropriate controls. He approves quantitative and qualitative chang-
es impacting the Group’s regulatory or economic capital, within the limits defined by the Chief Risk Officer.
While the day-to-day management of operational risk is the primary responsibility of our business divisions and infra-
structure functions, Group ORM oversees the Group-wide management of operational risks, identifies and reports risk
concentrations and promotes a consistent application of the ORMF across the Bank.
In 2016, we further embedded and refined our “Three Lines of Defence” model across the Bank. Our core areas of
focus were on business leaders continuing to assume primary accountability for the risks and controls in their units and
the second LoD Risk Type Controllers developing their risk management capabilities via the implementation of mini-
mum standards.
Managing Our Operational Risk

We manage operational risk using the ORMF which enables us to determine our operational risk profile in comparison
to our risk appetite, to systematically identify operational risk themes and concentrations, and to define risk mitigating
measures and priorities.
Employees – 252
In order to cover the broad range of risk types underlying operational risk, our framework contains a number of opera-
tional risk management techniques. These aim to efficiently manage the operational risk in our business and are used
to identify, assess and mitigate operational risks:
‒ Loss Data Collection: The continuous collection of operational risk loss events, as a prerequisite for operational risk
management, includes analyses and provision of timely information to senior management. All losses above
€ 10,000 are collected in our incident reporting system (dbIRS).
‒ The Lessons Learned process is triggered for events, including near misses, starting from € 500 thousand. This
process includes, but is not limited to:
‒ systematic risk analyses, including a description of the business environment in which the loss occurred, previ-
ous events, near misses and event-specific Key Risk Indicators,
‒ root cause analysis,
‒ review of control improvements and other actions to prevent or mitigate the recurrence, and
‒ assessment of the residual risk exposure.
The execution of corrective actions identified in this process are systematically tracked and reported monthly to sen-
ior management.
‒ Scenario Analyses: We complete our risk profile using a set of scenarios including relevant external cases provided
by a public database and additional internal scenarios. We thereby systematically utilize information on external loss
events occurring in the banking industry to prevent similar incidents from happening to us, for example through par-
ticular deep dive analyses or risk profile reviews.
‒ Emerging Risk Identification: We assess and approve the impact of changes on our risk profile as a result of new
products, outsourcing activities, strategic initiatives, acquisitions and divestments as well as material systems and
process changes. Once operational risks are identified and assessed, they are compared to the relevant specific
risk appetite statement and either mitigated or accepted. Risks that violate applicable national or international regu-
lations and legislation cannot be accepted; once identified, such risks must always be mitigated.
‒ Read-across Analysis: We continuously seek to enhance the process to assess whether identified issues require a
broader approach across multiple entities and locations within the Bank. A review of material findings is performed
in order to assess their relevance to areas of the Bank other than where they originated. We are developing busi-
ness intelligence software to identify risk clusters across the Bank accessing various sources of information. We aim
to increase our predictive analysis and clustering capabilities and to identify risk concentrations in a timely manner
through the use of this tool.
‒ Risk Mitigation: When we implement risk mitigating measures, we systematically monitor their resolution. Residual
operational risks rated “significant” or above, which the risk owner decides not to remediate, need to be formally risk
accepted by the risk owner of the risk bearing division. The decision is reviewed by relevant second LoD functions
and Group ORM. The Non-Financial Risk Committee has the right to veto the decision.
‒ We perform Top Risk Analyses in which the results of the aforementioned activities are considered. The Top Risk
Analyses are a primary input for the annual operational risk management strategy and planning process and aim to
identify our most critical risks in terms of probability and severity.
‒ Key Risk Indicators are used to monitor the operational risk profile and alert the organization to impending problems
in a timely fashion. Key Risk Indicators enable the monitoring of the Bank’s control culture and business environ-
ment and trigger risk mitigating actions. They facilitate the forward looking management of operational risks, based
on early warning signals.
‒ In our bottom-up Self-Assessment process areas with high risk potential are highlighted, and risk mitigating
measures to resolve issues are identified. On a regular basis we conduct risk workshops aiming to evaluate risks
specific to local legal entities and the countries we operate in, and take appropriate risk mitigating actions. We are in
the course of replacing this existing Self-Assessment process by an enhanced Risk and Control Assessment pro-
cess, supported by a group wide IT tool. During 2016, business divisions and infrastructure control functions have
completed Risk and Control Assessments to achieve over 90 % risk coverage. We will complete the remaining as-
sessments to achieve 100 % coverage with a target date of end of first quarter 2017.
Annual Report 2016
Additional functions, methodologies and tools implemented by the responsible second LoD Risk Type Controllers are
utilized to complement the ORMF and address specific risk types. These include:
‒ Compliance Risk is the current or prospective risk to earnings and capital arising from violations or non-compliance
with laws, rules, regulations, agreements, prescribed practices or ethical standards and can lead to fines, damages
and/ or the voiding of contracts and can diminish an institution’s reputation. Compliance Risk is managed by the
Bank’s Compliance department (supported by the Bank’s business divisions and infrastructure functions) through
identification of the adherence to material rules and regulations where non-compliance could lead to endangerment
of the Bank’s assets as well as acting to implement effective procedures for compliance and the setup of the corre-
sponding controls. The Compliance department further provides advisory services on the above and performs moni-
toring activities in relation to the coverage of new or changed material rules and regulations and assesses the
corresponding control environment; regularly reporting the results to the Management Board and Supervisory Board.
‒ Financial Crime risks are managed by our Anti-Financial Crime (“AFC”) function via maintenance and development
of a dedicated program. The AFC program is based on regulatory and supervisory requirements. AFC has defined
roles and responsibilities and established dedicated functions for the identification and management of financial
crime risks resulting from money laundering, terrorism financing, non-compliance with sanctions & embargoes as
well as other criminal activities including fraud, corruption and other crimes. AFC assures further update of its strat-
egy on financial crime prevention via regular development of internal policies and procedures, institution-specific risk
analysis and staff training.
‒ The Legal Department, with the assistance of its Legal Risk Management (“LRM”) function, is committed to the
management of the Bank’s legal risk. On behalf of Legal, LRM undertakes a broad variety of tasks aimed at proac-
tively managing legal risk, including: oversight of Legal’s participation in the Risk and Control Assessment in respect
of those risks for which Legal is Risk Type Controller; agreeing and participating in resulting portfolio reviews and
mitigation plans; overseeing the Legal Lessons Learned process; and conducting quality assurance reviews on Le-
gal´s processes, thereby assessing the robustness of the legal control framework and identifying control enhance-
ments.
‒ Information and Resilience Risk Management (“IRRM”) is Risk Type Controller for a number of risks in our Opera-
tional Risk Type Taxonomy. These include controls over infrastructure risks to prevent technology or process dis-
ruption, maintain information security and ensure businesses have robust plans in place to recover critical business
processes and functions in the event of disruption from technical or building outage, or the effects of cyber-attack or
natural disaster. IRRM also manages the risks arising from the Bank’s outsourced activities via the provision of a
comprehensive vendor risk management framework.
‒ Model Risk has been classified as a material risk for the Bank and is managed by a dedicated second LoD model
risk function. For further details, please refer to the standalone section on Model Risk Management in this report.
Measuring Our Operational Risks

We calculate and measure the regulatory and economic capital requirements for operational risk using the Advanced
Measurement Approach (“AMA”) methodology. Our AMA capital calculation is based upon the Loss Distribution Ap-
proach. Gross losses from historical internal and external loss data (Operational Riskdata eXchange Association con-
sortium data) and external scenarios from a public database (IBM OpData) complemented by internal scenario data
are used to estimate the risk profile (i.e., a loss frequency and a loss severity distribution). Our Loss Distribution Ap-
proach model includes conservatism by recognizing losses on events that arise over multiple years as single events in
our historical loss profile.
Within the Loss Distribution Approach model, the frequency and severity distributions are combined in a Monte Carlo
simulation to generate potential losses over a one year time horizon. Finally, the risk mitigating benefits of insurance
are applied to each loss generated in the Monte Carlo simulation. Correlation and diversification benefits are applied to
the net losses in a manner compatible with regulatory requirements to arrive at a net loss distribution at Group level,
covering expected and unexpected losses. Capital is then allocated to each of the business divisions after considering
qualitative adjustments and expected loss.
Employees – 252
The regulatory capital requirement for operational risk is derived from the 99.9 % percentile. The economic capital is
set at a level to absorb at a 99.98 % percentile very severe aggregate unexpected losses within one year. Both regula-
tory and economic capital requirements are calculated for a time horizon of one year.
The Regulatory and Economic Capital demand calculations are performed on a quarterly basis. Group ORM aims to
ensure that for the approach for capital demand quantification appropriate development, validation and change gov-
ernance processes are in place, whereby the validation is performed by an independent validation function and in line
with the Group’s model risk management process.
Drivers for Operational Risk Capital Development

In 2016, our operational risk losses have been predominantly driven by losses and provisions arising from civil litigation
and regulatory enforcement. Such losses account for more than 90 % of operational risk losses and account for the
majority of operational risk regulatory and economic capital demand. For a description of our current legal and regulato-
ry proceedings, please see section “Current Individual Proceedings” in Note 30 “Provisions”. Our non-legal operational
risk losses were lower compared to 2015.
Our operational risk management fosters a forward-looking risk management with regard to monitoring of potential
profits and losses, focusing on regular review of civil litigations and regulatory enforcement matters, trend analysis
based upon available losses and key risk indicator data.
This is particularly reflected in the management and measurement of our open civil litigation and regulatory enforce-
ment matters where the bank relies both on information from internal as well as external data sources to consider
developments in legal matters that affect the Bank specifically but also the banking industry as a whole. Reflecting the
multi-year nature of legal proceedings the measurement of these risks furthermore takes into account changing levels
of certainty by capturing the risks at various stages throughout the lifecycle of a legal matter.
Conceptually the Bank measures operational risk including legal risk by determining the maximum loss that will not be
exceeded with a given probability. This maximum loss amount includes a component that due to the IFRS criteria is
reflected in our financial statements and a component that is expressed as regulatory or economic capital demand that
is above the amount reflected as provisions within our financial statements.
‒ The legal losses which the Bank expects with a likelihood of more than 50 % are already reflected in our IFRS group
financial statements. These losses include net changes in provisions for existing and new cases in a specific period
where the loss is deemed probable and is reliably measurable in accordance with IAS 37. The development of our
legal provisions for civil litigations and regulatory enforcement is outlined in detail in Note 30 “Provisions” to our con-
solidated financial statements.
‒ Uncertain legal losses which are not reflected in our financial statements as provisions because they do not meet
the recognition criteria under IAS 37 are expressed as “regulatory or economic capital demand” reflecting our risk
exposure that consumes regulatory and economic capital.
To quantify the litigation losses in the AMA model the Bank takes into account historic losses, provisions, contingent
liabilities and legal forecasts. Legal forecasts are generally comprised of ranges of potential losses from legal matters
that are not deemed probable but are reasonably possible. Reasonably possible losses may result from ongoing and
new legal matters which are reviewed at least quarterly by the attorneys handling the legal matters.
We include the legal forecasts in the “Relevant Loss Data” used in our AMA model. Hereby the projection range of the
legal forecasts is not restricted to the one year capital time horizon but goes beyond and conservatively assumes early
settlement of the underlying losses in the reporting period - thus considering the multi-year nature of legal matters. This
reflection of legal forecasts within the AMA model has been in place since 2014 as part of a proactive implementation
of a model change request that was approved by our European supervisory authority, the ECB, in August 2016.
Annual Report 2016
Liquidity Risk Management

Liquidity risk is the risk arising from our potential inability to meet all payment obligations when they come due or only
being able to meet these obligations at excessive costs. The objective of the Group’s liquidity risk management frame-
work is to ensure that the Group can fulfill its payment obligations at all times and can manage liquidity and funding
risks within its risk appetite. The framework considers relevant and significant drivers of liquidity risk, whether on-
balance sheet or off-balance sheet.
Liquidity Risk Management Framework

In accordance with the ECB’s Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process (SREP), Deutsche Bank has implemented
an annual Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (“ILAAP”), which is reviewed and approved by the Man-
agement Board. The ILAAP provides comprehensive documentation of the Bank’s Liquidity Risk Management frame-
work, including: identifying the key liquidity and funding risks to which the Group is exposed; describing how these risks
are identified, monitored and measured and describing the techniques and resources used to manage and mitigate
these risks.
The Management Board defines the liquidity and funding risk strategy for the bank, as well as the risk appetite, based
on recommendations made by the Group Risk Committee (“GRC”). At least annually the Management Board reviews
and approves the limits which are applied to the Group to measure and control liquidity risk as well as our long-term
funding and issuance plan.
Treasury is mandated to manage the overall liquidity and funding position of the bank, with Liquidity Risk Control acting
as an independent control function, responsible for reviewing the liquidity risk framework, proposing the risk appetite to
GRC and the validation of Liquidity Risk models which are developed by Treasury, to measure and manage the
Group’s liquidity risk profile.
Treasury manages liquidity and funding, in accordance with the Management Board-approved risk appetite across a
range of relevant metrics, and implements a number of tools to monitor these and ensure compliance. In addition,
Treasury works closely in conjunction with Liquidity Risk Control (“LRC”), and the business, to analyze and understand
the underlying liquidity characteristics of the business portfolios. These parties are engaged in regular and frequent
dialogue to understand changes in the Bank’s position arising from business activities and market circumstances.
Dedicated business targets are allocated to ensure the Group meets its overall liquidity and funding appetite.
The Management Board is informed of performance against the risk appetite metrics, via a weekly Liquidity Scorecard.
As part of the annual strategic planning process, we project the development of the key liquidity and funding metrics
based on the underlying business plans to ensure that the plan is in compliance with our risk appetite.
Capital Markets Issuance

Deutsche Bank has a wide range of funding sources, including retail and institutional deposits, unsecured and secured
wholesale funding and debt issuance in the capital markets. Debt issuance, encompassing senior unsecured bonds,
covered bonds as well as capital securities, is a key source of term funding for the Bank and is managed directly by
Treasury. At least once a year Treasury submits an annual long-term Funding Plan to the GRC for recommendation
and then to the Management Board for approval. This plan is driven by global and local funding and liquidity require-
ments based on expected business development. Our capital markets portfolio is dynamically managed through our
yearly issuance plans to avoid excessive maturity concentrations.
Employees – 252
Short-term Liquidity and Wholesale Funding

Deutsche Bank tracks all contractual cash flows from wholesale funding sources, on a daily basis, over a 12-month
horizon. For this purpose, we consider wholesale funding to include unsecured liabilities raised primarily by Treasury
Pool Management, as well as secured liabilities raised by our Markets Division. Our wholesale funding counterparties
typically include corporates, banks and other financial institutions, governments and sovereigns.
The Group has implemented a set of Management Board approved limits to restrict DB’s exposure to wholesale coun-
terparties, which have historically shown to be the most susceptible to market stress. These wholesale funding limits
are calibrated against monthly stress-testing results, to ensure the Group remains liquid under our most severe stress
scenario, even if limits are fully utilized.
The wholesale funding limits are monitored daily, and apply to the total combined currency amount of all wholesale
funding currently outstanding, both secured and unsecured with specific tenor limits covering the first 8 weeks. Our
Liquidity Reserves are the primary mitigant against potential stress in short-term wholesale funding market.
The tables starting on page 195 show the contractual maturity of our short-term wholesale funding and capital markets
issuance.
Liquidity Stress Testing and Scenario Analysis

Global liquidity stress testing and scenario analysis is one of the key tools for measuring liquidity risk and evaluating the
Group’s short-term liquidity position within the liquidity framework. It complements the intraday operational liquidity
management process and the long-term liquidity strategy, represented by the Funding Matrix.
Our global liquidity stress testing process is managed by Treasury in accordance with the Management Board ap-
proved risk appetite. Treasury is responsible for the design of the overall methodology, including the definition of the
stress scenarios, the choice of liquidity risk drivers and the determination of appropriate assumptions (parameters) to
translate input data into model results. Liquidity Risk Control is responsible for the independent validation of liquidity
risk models. Treasury Reporting & Analysis (LTRA) is responsible for implementing these methodologies in conjunction
with Treasury and IT as well as for the stress test calculation.
We use stress testing and scenario analysis to evaluate the impact of sudden and severe stress events on our liquidity
position. The scenarios we apply are based on historic events, such as the 2008 financial markets crisis.
Deutsche Bank has selected five scenarios to calculate the Group’s stressed Net Liquidity Position (“sNLP”). These
scenarios capture the historical experience of Deutsche Bank during periods of idiosyncratic and/or market-wide stress
and are assumed to be both plausible and sufficiently severe as to materially impact the Group’s liquidity position. A
global market crisis, for example, is covered by a specific stress scenario (systemic market risk) that models the poten-
tial consequences observed during the financial crisis of 2008. Additionally, we have introduced regional market stress
scenarios. Under each of the scenarios we assume a high degree of maturing loans to non-wholesale customers is
rolled-over, to support our business franchise. Wholesale funding, from the most risk sensitive counterparties (including
banks and money-market mutual funds) is assumed to roll-off at contractual maturity or even be bought back, in the
acute phase of the stress.
In addition, we include the potential funding requirements from contingent liquidity risks which might arise, including
credit facilities, increased collateral requirements under derivative agreements, and outflows from deposits with a con-
tractual rating linked trigger.
Annual Report 2016
We then model the actions we would take to counterbalance the outflows incurred. Countermeasures include utilizing
the Liquidity Reserve and generating liquidity from unencumbered, marketable assets.
Stress testing is conducted at a global level and for defined individual legal entities. In addition to the global stress test,
stress tests for material currencies (EUR, USD and GBP) are performed. We review our stress-testing assumptions on
a regular basis and have made further enhancements to the methodology and severity of certain parameters through
the course of 2016.
We run the liquidity stress test over an eight-week horizon, which we consider the most critical time span in a liquidity
crisis, and apply the relevant stress assumptions to risk drivers from on-balance sheet and off-balance sheet products
on a daily basis. Beyond the eight week time horizon, we analyze the impact of a more prolonged stress period, ex-
tending to twelve months. This stress testing analysis is performed daily and on a monthly basis considering additional
balance sheet information.
Our internal risk appetite through 2016 was to maintain a surplus of at least € 5 billion throughout the 8 week stress
horizon under all scenarios for our monthly aggregate currency stress test. The target minimum risk appetite surplus
has been increased to €10 billion from January 2017.
The table on page 191 shows the results of our internal liquidity stress test under the various different scenarios.
Liquidity Coverage Ratio

In addition to our internal stress test result, the Group has a Management Board approved risk appetite for the Liquidity
Coverage Ratio (“LCR”). Finalized by the Basel Committee in January 2013, the LCR is intended to promote the short-
term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk profile over a 30 day stress scenario. The ratio is defined as the amount of High
Quality Liquid Assets (“HQLA”) that could be used to raise liquidity, measured against the total volume of net cash
outflows, arising from both actual and contingent exposures, in a stressed scenario.
This requirement has been implemented into European law, via the Commission Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/61,
adopted in October 2014. Compliance with the LCR was required in the EU from October 1, 2015. The Liquidity Cover-
age Ratio is subject to a transitional phase-in period, of 70 % from January 1, 2016, rising to 80 % in 2017 and 100 %
in 2018.
The LCR complements the internal stress testing framework. By maintaining a ratio in excess of minimum regulatory
requirements, the LCR seeks to ensure that the Group holds adequate liquidity resources to mitigate a short-term
liquidity stress.
Our internal risk appetite is to maintain a LCR ratio of at least 105 %.
Key differences between the liquidity stress test and LCR include the time horizon (eight weeks versus 30 days), classi-
fication and haircut differences between Liquidity Reserves and the LCR HQLA, outflow rates for various categories of
funding, and inflow assumption for various assets (for example, loan repayments).Our liquidity stress test also includes
outflows related to intraday liquidity assumptions, which the LCR excludes.
Employees – 252
Funding Risk Management

Structural Funding
Deutsche Bank’s primary tool for monitoring and managing funding risk is the Funding Matrix. The Funding Matrix
assesses the Group’s structural funding profile for the greater than one year time horizon. To produce the Funding
Matrix, all funding-relevant assets and liabilities are mapped into time buckets corresponding to their contractual or
modeled maturities. This allows the Group to identify expected excesses and shortfalls in term liabilities over assets in
each time bucket, facilitating the management of potential liquidity exposures.
The liquidity maturity profile is based on contractual cash flow information. If the contractual maturity profile of a product
does not adequately reflect the liquidity maturity profile, it is replaced by modeling assumptions. Short-term balance
sheet items (<1yr) or matched funded structures (asset and liabilities directly matched with no liquidity risk) can be
excluded from the term analysis.
The bottom-up assessment by individual business line is combined with a top-down reconciliation against the Group’s
IFRS balance sheet. From the cumulative term profile of assets and liabilities beyond 1 year, any long-funded surplus-
es or short-funded gaps in the Group’s maturity structure can be identified. The cumulative profile is thereby built up
starting from the above 10 year bucket down to the above 1 year bucket.
The strategic liquidity planning process, which incorporates the development of funding supply and demand across
business units, together with the bank’s targeted key liquidity and funding metrics, provides the key input parameter for
our annual capital markets issuance plan. Upon approval by the Management Board the capital markets issuance plan
establishes issuing targets for securities by tenor, volume and instrument. We also maintain a stand-alone U.S. dollar
and GBP funding matrix which limits the maximum short position in any time bucket (more than 1 year to more than
10 years) to € 10 billion and € 5 billion respectively. This supplements the risk appetite for our aggregate currency
funding matrix which requires us to maintain a positive funding position in any time bucket (more than 1 year to more
than 10 years).
Net Stable Funding Ratio

The Net Stable Funding Ratio (“NSFR”) was proposed as part of Basel 3, as the regulatory metric for assessing a
bank’s structural funding profile. The NSFR is intended to reduce medium to long-term funding risks by requiring banks
to maintain a stable funding profile in relation to their on- and off-balance sheet activities. The ratio is defined as the
amount of Available Stable Funding (the portion of capital and liabilities expected to be a stable source of funding),
relative to the amount of Required Stable Funding (a function of the liquidity characteristics of various assets held).
Although the NSFR is scheduled to become a minimum standard internationally, by January 1, 2018, the ratio is sub-
ject to national implementation. In the EU, on November 23, 2016, the Commission published a legislative proposal to
amend the CRR. The proposal defines, inter alia, a mandatory quantitative NSFR requirement and which would apply
two years after the proposal’s entry into force. The proposal remains subject to change in the EU legislative process.
Therefore, for banks domiciled in the EU, the final definition of the ratio and associated implementation timeframe has
not yet been confirmed.
We are currently in the process of assessing the impacts of the NSFR, and would expect to formally embed this metric
within our overall liquidity risk management framework, once the relevant rules and timing within the EU have been
finally determined.
Annual Report 2016
Funding Diversification
Diversification of our funding profile in terms of investor types, regions, products and instruments is an important ele-
ment of our liquidity risk management framework. Our most stable funding sources come from capital markets and
equity, retail, and transaction banking clients. Other customer deposits and secured funding and shorts are additional
sources of funding. Unsecured wholesale funding represents unsecured wholesale liabilities sourced primarily by our
Treasury Pool division. Given the relatively short-term nature of these liabilities, they are primarily used to fund cash
and liquid trading assets.
To promote the additional diversification of our refinancing activities, we hold a Pfandbrief license allowing us to issue
mortgage Pfandbriefe. In addition, we have established a program for the purpose of issuing Covered Bonds under
Spanish law (Cedulas).
Unsecured wholesale funding comprises a range of unsecured products, such as Certificates of Deposit (CDs), Com-
mercial Paper (CP) as well as term, call and overnight deposits across tenors primarily up to one year.
To avoid any unwanted reliance on these short-term funding sources, and to promote a sound funding profile, which
complies with the defined risk appetite, we have implemented limits (across tenors) on these funding sources, which
are derived from our monthly stress testing analysis. In addition, we limit the total volume of unsecured wholesale
funding to manage the reliance on this funding source as part of the overall funding diversification.
The chart on page 188 shows the composition of our external funding sources that contribute to the liquidity risk posi-
tion, both in EUR billion and as a percentage of our total external funding sources.
Funds Transfer Pricing

The funds transfer pricing framework applies to all businesses and regions and promotes pricing of (i) assets in ac-
cordance with their underlying liquidity risk, (ii) liabilities in accordance with their liquidity value and funding maturity and
(iii) contingent liquidity exposures in accordance with the cost of providing for commensurate liquidity reserves to fund
unexpected cash requirements.
Deutsche Bank’s funds transfer pricing framework reflects regulatory principles and guidelines. Within this framework
all funding and liquidity risk costs and benefits are allocated to the firm’s business units based on market rates. Those
market rates reflect the economic costs of liquidity for Deutsche Bank. Treasury might set further financial incentives in
line with the Bank’s liquidity risk guidelines. While the framework promotes a diligent group-wide allocation of the
Bank's funding costs to the liquidity users, it also provides an incentive based compensation framework for businesses
generating stable long-term and stress compliant funding. Funding relevant transactions are subject to liquidity (term)
premiums and/or other funds transfer pricing mechanisms depending on market conditions. Liquidity premiums are set
by Treasury and reflected in a segregated Treasury liquidity account which is the aggregator of liquidity costs and
benefits. The management and allocation of the liquidity account cost base is the key variable for funds transfer pricing
within Deutsche Bank.
Employees – 252
Liquidity Reserves
Liquidity reserves comprise available cash and cash equivalents, highly liquid securities (includes government, agency
and government guaranteed) as well as other unencumbered central bank eligible assets.
The volume of our liquidity reserves is a function of our expected daily stress result, both at an aggregate level as well
as at an individual currency level. To the extent we receive incremental short-term wholesale liabilities which attract a
high stress roll-off, we will largely keep the proceeds of such liabilities in cash or highly liquid securities as a stress
mitigant. Accordingly, the total volume of our liquidity reserves will fluctuate as a function of the level of short-term
wholesale liabilities held, although this has no material impact on our overall liquidity position under stress. Our liquidity
reserves include only assets that are freely transferable within the Group, or can be applied against local entity stress
outflows. We hold the vast majority of our liquidity reserves centrally, at our parent and our foreign branches with fur-
ther reserves held at key locations in which we are active. While we hold our reserves across major currencies, their
size and composition are subject to regular senior management review.
Asset Encumbrance
Encumbered assets primarily comprise those on- and off-balance sheet assets that are pledged as collateral against
secured funding, collateral swaps, and other collateralized obligations. We generally encumber loans to support long-
term capital markets secured issuance such as Pfandbriefe or other self-securitization structures, while financing debt
and equity inventory on a secured basis is a regular activity for our Global Markets business. Additionally, in line with
the EBA technical standards on regulatory asset encumbrance reporting, we consider assets placed with settlement
systems, including default funds and initial margins as encumbered, as well as other assets pledged which cannot be
freely withdrawn such as mandatory minimum reserves at central banks. We also include derivative margin receivable
assets as encumbered under these EBA guidelines.
Business (Strategic) Risk Management

Strategic risk is the risk of suffering operating income shortfall due to a decrease in revenues which cannot be com-
pensated by cost reduction. It is a material risk type that may arise from our failure to execute our strategy, our failure
to position the Bank strategically, or our ineffective response to material negative plan deviations caused by external or
internal factors.
The management of strategic risk involves minimizing potential operating income shortfall that can have an adverse
impact on Group capital. This is accomplished using risk controls at the Group level and at our different business units.
Reputational Risk Management

Within our risk management process, we define reputational risk as the risk of possible damage to our brand and repu-
tation, and the associated risk to earnings, capital or liquidity, arising from any association, action or inaction which
could be perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate, unethical or inconsistent with DB’s values and beliefs.
Annual Report 2016
Our reputational risk is governed by the Reputational Risk Framework (the Framework). The Framework was estab-
lished to provide consistent standards for the identification, assessment and management of reputational risk issues.
While every employee has a responsibility to protect our reputation, the primary responsibility for the identification,
assessment, management, monitoring and, if necessary, referring or reporting, of reputational risk matters lies with our
Business Divisions. Each employee is under an obligation, within the scope of his or her activities, to be alert to any
potential causes of reputational risk and to address them according to the Framework.
If a potential reputational risk is identified, it is required to be referred for further consideration within the Business Divi-
sion through their Unit Reputational Risk Assessment Process. In the event that a matter is deemed to carry a material
reputational risk and/or meets one of the mandatory referral criteria, it must be referred through to one of the four Re-
gional Reputational Risk Committees (RRRCs) for further review as the 2nd line of defence. The RRRCs are sub-
committees of the Group Reputational Risk Committee (GRRC), which is itself a sub-committee of the Group Risk
Committee (GRC), and are responsible for the oversight, governance and coordination of the management of reputa-
tional risk in their respective regions of Deutsche Bank on behalf of the Management Board. In exceptional circum-
stances, matters can also be referred by the RRRCs to the GRRC.
The modeling and quantitative measurement of reputational risk internal capital is implicitly covered in our economic
capital framework primarily within operational and strategic risk.
Model Risk Management

Model risk is the potential for adverse consequences from incorrect or misused model outputs and reports using these
outputs. Model risk can lead to financial loss, poor business or strategic decision making, or damage our reputation. In
this context, the term ‘model’ refers to a quantitative method, system, or approach that applies statistical, economic,
financial, or mathematical theories, techniques, and assumptions to process input data into quantitative estimates.
Model risk is managed across Pricing models, Risk & Capital models, and other models:
‒ Pricing models are used to generate asset and liability fair value measurements reported in official books and rec-
ords and/or risk sensitivities which feed Market Risk Management (MRM) processes;
‒ Risk & Capital models are related to risks used for regulatory or internal capital requirements, e.g. VaR, IMM, Stress
tests etc;
‒ Other models are those outside of the Bank’s Pricing and Risk & Capital models.
Model risk appetite is aligned to the Group’s qualitative statements, ensuring that model risk management is embedded
in a strong risk culture and that risks are minimized to the extent possible.
The management of Model risk includes:
‒ Performing robust independent model validation that provides effective challenge to the model development pro-
cess and includes identification of conditions for use, methodological limitations that may require adjustments or
overlays, and validation findings that require remediation;
‒ Establishing a strong model risk management and governance framework, including senior forums for monitoring
and escalation of model risk related topics;
‒ Creating Bank-wide model risk related policies, aligned to regulatory requirements with clear roles and responsibili-
ties for key stakeholders across the model life cycle; and
‒ Assessing the model control environment and reporting to the Management Board on a periodic basis.
Employees – 252
Insurance Specific Risk Management

Following the sale of Abbey Life, our exposure to insurance risk relates primarily to our defined benefit pension obliga-
tions which are described in greater detail in the additional Note 36 “Employee Benefits”. In our risk management
framework, we consider insurance-related risks from pension obligations as non-trading market risk. In addition, there
is also some insurance-related risk within the Pensions and Insurance Risk Markets business which we consider as
trading market risk. We monitor the underlying assumptions in the calculation of these risks regularly and seek risk
mitigating measures such as reinsurances. Within the Pensions and Insurance Risk Markets business, most insurance-
related risks are hedged so that the bank is exposed to residual risks only. Risks arise primarily from:
‒ Longevity risk: the risk of faster or slower than expected improvements in life expectancy on immediate and de-
ferred annuity products;
‒ Mortality and morbidity risks: the risks of a higher or lower than expected number of death or disability claims on
insurance products and of an occurrence of one or more large claims; and
‒ Persistency risk: the risk of a higher or lower than expected percentage of lapsed policies.
Risk Concentration and Risk Diversification

Risk Concentrations
Risk concentrations refer to clusters of the same or similar risk drivers within specific risk types (intra-risk concentra-
tions in credit, market, operational, liquidity and other risks) as well as across different risk types (inter-risk concentra-
tions). They could occur within and across counterparties, businesses, regions/countries, industries and products. The
management of concentrations is integrated as part of the management of individual risk types and monitored on an
ongoing basis. The key objective is to avoid any undue concentrations in the portfolio, which is achieved through a
quantitative and qualitative approach, as follows:
‒ Intra-risk concentrations are assessed, monitored and mitigated by the individual risk disciplines (credit, market,
operational, liquidity risk management and others). This is supported by limit setting on different levels and/or man-
agement according to risk type.
‒ Inter-risk concentrations are managed through quantitative top-down stress-testing and qualitative bottom-up re-
views, identifying and assessing risk themes independent of any risk type and providing a holistic view across the
bank.
The most senior governance body for the oversight of risk concentrations throughout 2016 was the Enterprise Risk
Committee (ERC), which is a subcommittee of the Group Risk Committee (GRC).
Risk Type Diversification Benefit

The risk type diversification benefit quantifies diversification effects between credit, market, operational and strategic
risk in the economic capital calculation. To the extent correlations between these risk types fall below 1.0, a risk type
diversification benefit results. The calculation of the risk type diversification benefit is intended to ensure that the
standalone economic capital figures for the individual risk types are aggregated in an economically meaningful way.
Annual Report 2016
Risk and Capital Performance
Capital and Leverage Ratio

Regulatory Capital
The calculation of our regulatory capital incorporates the capital requirements following the “Regulation (EU)
No 575/2013 on prudential requirements for credit institutions and investment firms” (Capital Requirements Regulation
or “CRR”) and the “Directive 2013/36/EU on access to the activity of credit institutions and the prudential supervision of
credit institutions and investment firms” (Capital Requirements Directive 4 or “CRD 4”) as implemented into German
law. The information in this section as well as in the section “Development of risk-weighted Assets” is based on the
regulatory principles of consolidation.
When referring to results according to full application of the final CRR/CRD 4 framework (without consideration of
applicable transitional methodology) we use the term “CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded”. In some cases, CRR/CRD 4 maintains
transitional rules that had been adopted in earlier capital adequacy frameworks through Basel 2 or Basel 2.5. These
relate, e.g., to the risk weighting of certain categories of assets and include rules permitting the grandfathering of equity
investments at a risk-weight of 100 %. In this regard, we assume in our CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded methodology for a
limited subset of equity positions that the impact of the expiration of these transitional rules will be mitigated through
sales of the underlying assets or other measures prior to the expiration of the grandfathering provisions by end of 2017.
This section refers to the capital adequacy of the group of institutions consolidated for banking regulatory purposes
pursuant to the CRR and the German Banking Act (“Kreditwesengesetz” or “KWG”). Therein not included are insur-
ance companies or companies outside the finance sector. Our insurance companies are included in an additional
capital adequacy (also “solvency margin”) calculation under the German Solvency Regulation for Financial Conglomer-
ates. Our solvency margin as a financial conglomerate remains dominated by our banking activities.
The total regulatory capital pursuant to the effective regulations as of year-end 2016 comprises Tier 1 and Tier 2 (T2)
capital. Tier 1 capital is subdivided into Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital.
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital consists primarily of common share capital (reduced by own holdings) including
related share premium accounts, retained earnings (including losses for the financial year, if any) and accumulated
other comprehensive income, subject to regulatory adjustments (i.e. prudential filters and deductions). Prudential filters
for CET 1, according to Articles 32 to 35 CRR, include (i) securitization gain on sale, (ii) cash flow hedges and changes
in the value of own liabilities, and (iii) additional value adjustments. CET 1 capital deductions comprise (i) intangible
assets, (ii) deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability, (iii) negative amounts resulting from the calculation of
expected loss amounts, (iv) net defined benefit pension fund assets, (v) reciprocal cross holdings in the capital of finan-
cial sector entities and, (vi) significant and non-significant investments in the capital (CET 1, AT1, T2) of financial sector
entities above certain thresholds. All items not deducted (i.e., amounts below the threshold) are subject to risk-
weighting.
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital consists of AT1 capital instruments and related share premium accounts as well as
noncontrolling interests qualifying for inclusion in consolidated AT1, and during the transitional period grandfathered
instruments eligible under earlier frameworks. To qualify as AT1 under CRR/CRD 4, instruments must have principal
loss absorption through a conversion to common shares or a write-down mechanism allocating losses at a trigger point
and must also meet further requirements (perpetual with no incentive to redeem; institution must have full dividend/cou-
pon discretion at all times, etc.).
► Risk and Capital Performance Corporate Governance Statement pursuant to
Employees – 252
Tier 2 (T2) capital comprises eligible capital instruments, the related share premium accounts and subordinated long-
term debt, certain loan loss provisions and noncontrolling interests that qualify for inclusion in consolidated T2. To
qualify as T2, capital instruments or subordinated debt must have an original maturity of at least five years. Moreover,
eligible capital instruments may inter alia not contain an incentive to redeem, a right of investors to accelerate repay-
ment, or a credit sensitive dividend feature.
Capital instruments that no longer qualify as AT1 or T2 capital under the CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded rules are subject to
grandfathering rules during transitional period and are phased out from 2013 to 2022 with their recognition capped at
60 % in 2016 and the cap decreasing by 10 % every year.
Capital Instruments
The 2015 Annual General Meeting granted our Management Board the authority to buy back up to 137.9 million shares
before the end of April 2020. Thereof 69.0 million shares can be purchased by using derivatives. These authorizations
replaced the authorizations of the 2014 Annual General Meeting. We have received approval for compensation related
share buybacks from the BaFin for 2015 and from the ECB for 2016 according to new CRR/CRD 4 rules. During the
period from the 2015 Annual General Meeting until the 2016 Annual General Meeting (May 19, 2016), we purchased
37.9 million shares, of which 4.7 million shares through exercise of call options. The shares purchased were used for
equity compensation purposes in the same period or were to be used in the upcoming period so that the number of
shares held in Treasury from buybacks was 12.1 million as of the 2016 Annual General Meeting.
The 2016 Annual General Meeting granted our Management Board the approval to buy back up to 137.9 million shares
before the end of April 2021. Thereof 69.0 million shares can be purchased by using derivatives. These authorizations
substitute the authorizations of the previous year. During the period from the 2016 Annual General Meeting until De-
cember 31, 2016, 0.9 million shares have been repurchased. The shares purchased were used for equity compensa-
tion purposes in the same period so that no shares from buybacks were held in Treasury as of December 31, 2016.
Since the 2015 Annual General Meeting, and as of December 31, 2016, authorized capital available to the Manage-
ment Board was € 1,760 million (688 million shares). As of December 31, 2016, the conditional capital stood at
€ 486 million (190 million shares).
Our legacy Hybrid Tier 1 capital instruments (substantially all noncumulative trust preferred securities) are not fully
recognized under fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 rules, mainly because they have no write-down or equity conversion feature.
However, they are to a large extent recognized as Additional Tier 1 capital under CRR/CRD 4 transitional provisions
and can still be partially recognized as Tier 2 capital under the fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 rules. During the transitional
phase-out period the maximum recognizable amount of Additional Tier 1 instruments from Basel 2.5 compliant issu-
ances as of December 31, 2012 will be reduced at the beginning of each financial year by 10 % or € 1.3 billion, through
2022. For December 31, 2016, this resulted in eligible Additional Tier 1 instruments of € 11.1 billion (i.e. € 4.6 billion
newly issued AT1 Notes plus € 6.5 billion of legacy Hybrid Tier 1 instruments recognizable during the transition period).
One Hybrid Tier 1 capital instrument with a notional of $ 0.2 billion and an eligible equivalent amount of € 0.1 billion had
been called in 2016. € 6.0 billion of the legacy Hybrid Tier 1 instruments can still be recognized as Tier 2 capital under
the fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 rules. Additional Tier 1 instruments recognized after regulatory adjustments under fully
loaded CRR/CRD 4 rules amounted to € 4.6 billion as of December 31, 2016.
On May 19, 2016, we issued fixed rate subordinated Tier 2 notes with an aggregate amount of € 750 million. The notes
have a denomination of € 100,000 and are due April 19, 2026. They were issued in transactions outside of the United
States, not subject to the registration requirements of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, and were not offered
or sold in the United States.
Annual Report 2016
Furthermore, we issued fixed rate subordinated Tier 2 notes with an aggregate amount of € 31 million on June 15,
2016. The notes have a denomination of € 100,000 and are due June 15, 2026. They were issued in transactions
outside of the United States, not subject to the registration requirements of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended,
and were not offered or sold in the United States.
The total of our Tier 2 capital instruments as of December 31, 2016 recognized after regulatory adjustments during the
transition period under CRR/CRD 4 was € 6.7 billion. As of December 31, 2016, there are no further legacy Hybrid
Tier 1 instruments that are counted as Tier 2 capital under transitional rules. The gross notional value of the Tier 2
capital instruments was € 8.0 billion. No Tier 2 capital instrument had been called in 2016. Tier 2 instruments recog-
nized under fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 rules amounted to € 12.7 billion as of December 31, 2016 (including the
€ 6.0 billion legacy Hybrid Tier 1 capital instruments only recognizable as Additional Tier 1 capital during the transitional
period).
Minimum capital requirements and additional capital buffers

The Pillar 1 CET 1 minimum capital requirement applicable to the Group is 4.50 % of risk-weighted assets (RWA). The
Pillar 1 total capital requirement of 8.00 % demands further resources that may be met with up to 1.50 % Additional
Tier 1 capital and up to 2.00 % Tier 2 capital.
Failure to meet minimum capital requirements can result in supervisory measures such as restrictions of profit distribu-
tions or limitations on certain businesses such as lending. We complied with the regulatory capital adequacy require-
ments in 2016. Our subsidiaries which were not included in our regulatory consolidation due to their immateriality did
not have to comply with own minimum capital standards in 2016.
In addition to these minimum capital requirements, the following combined capital buffer requirements have been
phased in since 2016 (other than the systemic risk buffer, if any, which is not subject to any phase-in) and will become
fully effective from 2019 onwards. The buffer requirements must be met in addition to the Pillar 1 minimum capital
requirements, but can be drawn down in times of economic stress.
In March 2015, Deutsche Bank was designated as a G-SII by the German Federal Financial Supervisory Authority
(BaFin) in agreement with Deutsche Bundesbank resulting in a G-SII buffer requirement of 2.00 % CET 1 capital of
RWA in 2019. This is in line with the Financial Stability Board (FSB) assessment of systemic importance based on the
indicators as published in 2015. The additional buffer requirement of 2.00 % for G-SIIs was phased in with 0.50 % in
2016 and in 2017 amounts to 1.00 %. We will continue to publish our indicators on our website.
The capital conservation buffer is implemented in Section 10c German Banking Act based on Article 129 CRD 4 and
equals a requirement of 2.50 % CET 1 capital of RWA. The additional buffer requirement of 2.50 % was phased in with
0.625 % in 2016 and in 2017 amounts to 1.25 %.
The countercyclical capital buffer is deployed in a jurisdiction when excess credit growth is associated with an increase
in system-wide risk. It may vary between 0 % and 2.50 % CET 1 capital of RWA by 2019. In exceptional cases, it could
also be higher than 2.50 %. The institution specific countercyclical buffer that applies to Deutsche Bank is the weighted
average of the countercyclical capital buffers that apply in the jurisdictions where our relevant credit exposures are
located. As per December 31, 2016 (and currently), the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer was at 0.01 %.
In addition to the aforementioned buffers, national authorities, such as the BaFin, may require a systemic risk buffer to
prevent and mitigate long-term non-cyclical systemic or macro-prudential risks that are not covered by the CRR. They
can require an additional buffer of up to 5.00 % CET 1 capital of RWA. As of the year-end 2016 (and currently), no
systemic risk buffer applied to Deutsche Bank.
Employees – 252
Additionally, Deutsche Bank AG has been classified by BaFin as other systemically important institution (O-SII) with an
additional buffer requirement of 2.00 % that has to be met on a consolidated level. For Deutsche Bank, the O-SII buffer
is applied in steps of 0.66 % in 2017, 1.32 % in 2018 and 2.00 % in 2019. As of the year-end 2016, no O-SII buffer
applied to Deutsche Bank.
Unless certain exceptions apply, only the higher of the systemic risk buffer, G-SII buffer and O-SII buffer must be ap-
plied. Accordingly, the O-SII buffer is currently not applied because it is lower than the G-SII buffer.
In addition, pursuant to the Pillar 2 Supervisory Review and Evaluation Process (SREP), the European Central Bank
(ECB) may impose capital requirements on individual banks which are more stringent than statutory requirements (so-
called Pillar 2 requirement). On December 4, 2015, the ECB informed Deutsche Bank that the consolidated Group has
to keep a CET 1 ratio of at least 10.25 % on a phase-in basis under applicable transitional rules under CRR/CRD 4 at
all times. Considering the G-SII buffer of 0.50 % and the countercyclical buffer of 0.01 %, our overall CET 1 require-
ments amounted to 10.76 % as of December 31, 2016. Correspondingly the requirements for Deutsche Bank's Tier 1
capital ratio were at 12.26 % and total capital ratio at 14.26 % as of December 31, 2016.
On December 8, 2016, Deutsche Bank has been informed by the ECB of its decision regarding prudential minimum
capital requirements for 2017, following the results of the 2016 SREP. The decision requires Deutsche Bank to main-
tain a phase-in CET 1 ratio of at least 9.51 % on a consolidated basis, beginning on January 1, 2017. This CET 1
capital requirement comprises the Pillar 1 minimum capital requirement of 4.50 %, the Pillar 2 requirement (SREP Add-
on) of 2.75 %, the phase-in capital conservation buffer of 1.25 %, the countercyclical buffer (currently 0.01 %) and the
phase-in G-SII buffer following Deutsche Bank's designation as a global systemically important institution (“G-SII”) of
1.00 %. The new CET 1 capital requirement of 9.51 % for 2017 is lower than the CET 1 capital requirement of 10.76 %,
which was applicable to Deutsche Bank in 2016. Correspondingly, 2017 requirements for Deutsche Bank's Tier 1
capital ratio are at 11.01 % and for its total capital ratio at 13.01 %. Also, following the results of the 2016 SREP, the
ECB communicated to us an individual expectation to hold a further “Pillar 2” CET 1 capital add-on, commonly referred
to as the ‘“Pillar 2” guidance’. The capital add-on pursuant to the “Pillar 2” guidance is separate from and in addition to
the Pillar 2 requirement. The ECB has stated that it expects banks to meet the “Pillar 2” guidance although it is not
legally binding, and failure to meet the “Pillar 2” guidance does not automatically trigger legal action.
The following table gives an overview of the different Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 minimum capital requirements (but excluding
the “Pillar 2” guidance) as well as capital buffer requirements applicable to Deutsche Bank in the years 2016 and 2017
(articulated on a phase-in basis):
Overview total capital requirements and capital buffers

2016 2017
Pillar 1
Minimum CET 1 requirement 4.50 % 4.50 %
Capital Conservation Buffer 0.625 % 1.25 %
Countercyclical Buffer 0.01 % 0.01 % 1
G-SII Buffer 3 0.50 % 1.00 %
O-SII Buffer 3 0.00 % 0.66 %
Systemic Risk Buffer 3 0.00 % 0.00 % 2
Pillar 2
Pillar 2 SREP Add-on of CET 1 capital (excluding the "Pillar 2" guidance) 5.125 % 2.75 %
SREP CET 1 Requirement 10.25 % 8.50 %
Total CET 1 requirement from Pillar 1 and 2 4 10.76 % 9.51 %
Total Tier 1 requirement from Pillar 1 and 2 12.26 % 11.01 %
Total capital requirement from Pillar 1 and 2 14.26 % 13.01 %
1 Deutsche Bank’s countercyclical buffer requirement is subject to country-specific buffer rates decreed by EBA and the Basel Committee of Banking Supervision
(BCBS) as well as Deutsche Bank’s relevant credit exposures as per respective reporting date. The countercyclical buffer rate for 2017 has been assumed to be
0.01 % due to unavailability of 2017 data.
2 The systemic risk buffer has been assumed to remain at 0 % for the projected year 2017, subject to changes based on further directives.
3 Unless certain exceptions apply only the higher of the systemic risk buffer, G-SII and O-SII buffer must be applied.
4 The total Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 CET 1 requirement (excluding the “Pillar 2” guidance) is calculated as the sum of the SREP requirement, the higher of the G-SII, O-
SII and systemic risk buffer requirement as well as the countercyclical buffer requirement.
Annual Report 2016
Development of regulatory capital

Our CRR/CRD 4 Tier 1 capital as of December 31, 2016 amounted to € 55.5 billion, consisting of a Common Equity
Tier 1 (CET 1) capital of € 47.8 billion and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital of € 7.7 billion. The CRR/CRD 4 Tier 1 capital
was € 2.7 billion lower than at the end of 2015, primarily driven by a decrease in CET 1 capital of € 4.6 billion since
year end 2015 while AT1 capital increased by € 1.9 billion in the same period.
The € 4.6 billion decrease of CRR/CRD 4 CET 1 capital was largely the result of increased regulatory adjustments due
to the higher phase-in rate of 60 % in 2016 compared to 40 % in 2015 and the net loss attributable to Deutsche Bank
shareholders and additional equity components of € 1.4 billion in 2016. The Decision (EU) (2015/4) of the ECB requires
the recognition of the year end loss in CET 1 capital. On March 5, 2017 the Management Board decided to recommend
a dividend of € 0.19 for 2015 and 2016 to the 2017 Annual General Meeting scheduled to take place in May 2017,
taking into account expected shares following the Bank’s proposed capital increase. Based on this new decision, regu-
latory capital as of year end 2016 was impacted by an accrual deduction of € 0.4 billion. This dividend accrual is in line
with ECB Decision (EU) (2015/4) on the recognition of interim or year-end profits in CET 1 capital. The positive year-on
year effect of € 0.6 billion under the CRR/CRD 4 transitional rules resulting from the reversal of the 15 % threshold
related deductions due to the sale of our participation in Hua Xia Bank was more than offset by a number of negative
effects including remeasurement losses relating to defined benefit pension plans of € 0.5 billion as well as an additional
capital deduction of € 0.3 billion that was imposed on Deutsche Bank effective from October 2016 onwards based on a
notification by the ECB pursuant to Article 16(1)(c), 16(2)(b) and (j) of Regulation (EU) No 1024/2013.
The € 1.9 billion increase in CRR/CRD 4 AT1 capital was mainly the result of reduced regulatory adjustments (€ 1.9 bil-
lion lower than at year end 2015) that were phased out from AT1 capital. These items reflect the residual amount of
certain CET 1 deductions that are subtracted from CET 1 capital under fully loaded rules, but are allowed to reduce
AT1 capital during the transitional period. The phase-in rate for these deductions on the level of CET 1 capital in-
creased to 60 % in 2016 (40 % in 2015) and decreased correspondingly on the level of AT1 capital to 40 % in 2016
(60 % in 2015).
Our fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 Tier 1 capital as of December 31, 2016 was € 46.8 billion, compared to € 48.7 billion at
the end of 2015. Our fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 CET 1 capital amounted to € 42.3 billion as of December 31, 2016,
compared to € 44.1 billion as of December 31, 2015. Our fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 Additional Tier 1 capital amounted
to € 4.6 billion as per end of December 2016, unchanged compared to year end 2015.
The decrease of our fully loaded CET 1 capital of € 1.8 billion compared to year end 2015 capital was largely the result
of our negative net income of € 1.4 billion and the dividend accrual of € 0.4 billion. The positive year-on-year effect of
€ 1.8 billion resulting from the reversal of the 15 % threshold-related deductions due to the sale of our participation in
Hua Xia Bank was almost entirely offset by a number of negative effects including higher CET 1 capital deductions of
deferred tax assets on unused tax losses of € 0.5 billion, remeasurement losses related to defined benefit pension
plans of € 0.5 billion, the additional capital deduction of € 0.3 billion that was imposed on Deutsche Bank effective from
October 2016 onwards and a further decrease of € 0.5 billion mainly driven by net unrealized losses on financial assets
available for sale.
Employees – 252
Transitional template for regulatory capital, RWA and capital ratios

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
CRR/CRD 4 CRR/CRD 4
in € m. fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded CRR/CRD 4
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital: instruments and reserves
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts 37,290 37,290 37,088 37,088
Retained earnings 20,113 20,113 27,607 27,607
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax 3,708 3,645 4,096 4,281
Independently reviewed interim profits net of any foreseeable charge or dividend 1 (2,023) (2,023) (7,025) (7,025)
Other 0 79 0 92
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital before regulatory adjustments 59,088 59,104 61,766 62,042
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital: regulatory adjustments

Additional value adjustments (negative amount) (1,398) (1,398) (1,877) (1,877)
Other prudential filters (other than additional value adjustments) (639) (428) (622) (330)
Goodwill and other intangible assets (net of related tax liabilities) (negative amount) (8,436) (5,062) (8,439) (3,376)
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from
temporary differences (net of related tax liabilities where the conditions in Art. 38 (3)
CRR are met) (negative amount) (3,854) (2,312) (3,310) (1,324)
Negative amounts resulting from the calculation of expected loss amounts (297) (188) (106) (58)
Defined benefit pension fund assets (negative amount) (945) (567) (1,173) (469)
Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by an institution of own CET 1 instruments
(negative amount) (59) (41) (76) (39)
Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET 1 instruments of
financial sector entities where the institution has a significant investment in those
entities (amount above the 10 % / 15 % thresholds and net of eligible short posi-
tions) (negative amount) 0 0 (818) (278)
Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (net of related tax liabilities
where the conditions in Art. 38 (3) CRR are met) (amount above the 10 % / 15 %
thresholds) (negative amount) (590) (354) (953) (324)
Other regulatory adjustments 2 (591) (971) (291) (1,537)
Total regulatory adjustments to Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital (16,810) (11,321) (17,665) (9,613)
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital 42,279 47,782 44,101 52,429
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital: instruments

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts 4,676 4,676 4,676 4,676
Amount of qualifying items referred to in Art. 484 (4) CRR and the related share
premium accounts subject to phase out from AT1 N/M 6,516 N/M 6,482
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital before regulatory adjustments 4,676 11,191 4,676 11,157
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital: regulatory adjustments

Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by an institution of own AT1 instruments
(negative amount) (125) (51) (125) (48)
Residual amounts deducted from AT1 capital with regard to deduction from CET 1
capital during the transitional period pursuant to Art. 472 CRR N/M (3,437) N/M (5,316)
Other regulatory adjustments 0 0 0 0
Total regulatory adjustments to Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital (125) (3,488) (125) (5,365)
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital 4,551 7,703 4,551 5,793
Tier 1 capital (T1 = CET 1 + AT1) 46,829 55,486 48,651 58,222
Tier 2 (T2) capital 12,673 6,672 12,325 6,299

Total capital (TC = T1 + T2) 59,502 62,158 60,976 64,522
Total risk-weighted assets 357,518 356,235 396,714 397,382
Capital ratios
Common Equity Tier 1 capital ratio (as a percentage of risk-weighted assets) 11.8 13.4 11.1 13.2
Tier 1 capital ratio (as a percentage of risk-weighted assets) 13.1 15.6 12.3 14.7
Total capital ratio (as a percentage of risk-weighted assets) 16.6 17.4 15.4 16.2
1 Reflects the Management Board’s decision to propose a dividend per share of € 0.19 for 2015 and 2016 taking into consideration the expected shares to be issued
before the Annual General Meeting in May 2017.

2 Including an additional capital deduction of € 0.3 billion that was imposed on Deutsche Bank effective from October 2016 onwards based on a notification by the
ECB pursuant to Article 16(1)(c), 16(2)(b) and (j) of Regulation (EU) No 1024/2013 as well as the additional filter for funds for home loans and savings protection
(“Fonds für bauspartechnische Absicherung”) of € 0.2 billion.
Annual Report 2016
Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity to regulatory capital

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
in € m. CRR/CRD 4 CRR/CRD 4
Total shareholders’ equity per accounting balance sheet 59,833 62,678
Deconsolidation/Consolidation of entities (123) (681)
Thereof:
Additional paid-in capital (6) (5)
Retained earnings (276) (369)
Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss), net of tax 159 (307)
Total shareholders' equity per regulatory balance sheet 59,710 61,997
Noncontrolling interest based on transitional rules 79 92
Accrual for dividend and AT1 coupons1 (621) (231)
Reversal of deconsolidation/consolidation of the position Accumulated other comprehensive income (loss),
net of tax, during transitional period (63) 184
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital before regulatory adjustments 59,104 62,042
Additional value adjustments (1,398) (1,877)
Other prudential filters (other than additional value adjustments) (428) (330)
Regulatory adjustments relating to unrealized gains and losses pursuant to Art. 467 and 468 CRR (380) (1,246)
Goodwill and other intangible assets (net of related tax liabilities) (5,062) (3,376)
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability (2,666) (1,648)
Defined benefit pension fund assets (567) (469)
Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET 1 instruments of financial sector entities
where the institution has a significant investment in those entities 0 (278)
Other regulatory adjustments (820) (389)
Common Equity Tier 1 capital 47,782 52,429
Employees – 252
Development of regulatory capital

CRR/CRD 4
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital - opening amount 52,429 60,103
Common shares, net effect 0 0
Additional paid-in capital 192 (53)
Retained earnings (1,826) (6,097)
Common shares in treasury, net effect/(+) sales (–) purchase 10 (3)
Movements in accumulated other comprehensive income 231 2,759
Accrual for dividend and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) coupons1 (621) (231)
Additional value adjustments 479 (1,877)
Goodwill and other intangible assets (net of related tax liabilities) (1,686) (780)
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability (excluding those arising from temporary differences) (988) (800)
Negative amounts resulting from the calculation of expected loss amounts (130) 89
Defined benefit pension fund assets (97) (277)
Direct, indirect and synthetic holdings by the institution of the CET 1 instruments of financial sector entities
where the institution has a significant investment in those entities 278 (194)
Securitization positions not included in risk-weighted assets 0 0
Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10 % and 15 % threshold,
net of related tax liabilities where the conditions in Art. 38 (3) CRR are met) (30) (191)
Other, including regulatory adjustments (457) (19)
Common Equity Tier 1 (CET 1) capital - closing amount 47,782 52,429
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) Capital – opening amount 5,793 3,794
New Additional Tier 1 eligible capital issues 0 0
Matured and called instruments (76) (4,289)
Transitional arrangements 1,879 5,529
Thereof:
Goodwill and other intangible assets (net of related tax liabilities) 1,689 5,320
Other, including regulatory adjustments 108 759
Additional Tier 1 (AT1) Capital – closing amount 7,703 5,793
Tier 1 capital 55,486 58,222
Tier 2 (T2) capital – closing amount 6,672 6,299
Total regulatory capital 62,158 64,522
Development of risk-weighted assets

The table below provides an overview of RWA broken down by model approach and business division. They include
the aggregated effects of the segmental reallocation of infrastructure related positions, if applicable, as well as realloca-
tions between the segments.
Within credit risk, the line item “Other” in advanced IRBA reflects RWA from securitization positions in the banking book,
specific equity positions and other non-credit obligation assets. Within the Standardized Approach, the line item “Other”
includes RWA from banking book securitizations as well as exposures assigned to the further exposure classes apart
from central governments or central banks, institutions, corporates and retail.
Annual Report 2016
Risk-weighted assets by model approach and business division according to transitional rules
Dec 31, 2016
Private, Consoli-
Global Investment Commercial Asset Operations Adjustments
in € m. Markets Banking Clients Management Postbank Unit and Other Total
Credit Risk 61,288 62,997 36,161 3,758 36,561 4,075 15,505 220,345
Segment reallocation 1,594 2,397 990 191 0 77 (5,249) 0
Advanced IRBA 52,218 58,214 31,924 1,713 29,901 2,318 19,167 195,454
Central Governments
and Central Banks 1,840 1,023 39 1 10 0 14,523 17,436
Institutions 7,903 3,168 140 31 1,205 47 778 13,272
Corporates 34,237 47,541 8,678 234 7,450 466 1,785 100,392
Retail 124 28 22,237 0 18,507 421 0 41,317
Other 8,114 6,454 830 1,447 2,729 1,383 2,081 23,038
Foundation IRBA 2,021 190 0 0 3,505 0 0 5,716
Central Governments
and Central Banks 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Institutions 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 6
Corporates 2,021 190 0 0 3,499 0 0 5,710
Standardized Approach 5,270 2,196 3,247 1,854 3,035 1,678 1,587 18,867
Central Governments
or Central Banks 22 0 2 0 50 0 0 75
Institutions 430 5 11 0 40 1 23 509
Corporates 2,136 1,351 1,103 834 731 697 1,096 7,948
Retail 1 187 1,543 0 1,656 83 0 3,470
Other 2,681 652 587 1,020 558 898 468 6,866
Risk exposure amount
for default funds
contributions 185 1 0 0 121 0 0 308
Settlement Risk 36 0 0 0 0 0 0 36
Credit Valuation
Adjustment (CVA) 8,846 39 43 139 252 90 8 9,416
Internal Model Approach 8,808 39 25 139 242 90 4 9,347
Standardized Approach 38 0 18 0 10 0 3 69
Market Risk 29,409 788 0 0 62 3,502 0 33,762
Internal Model Approach 25,595 788 0 0 0 2,780 0 29,163
Standardized Approach 3,814 0 0 0 62 722 0 4,599
Operational Risk 58,032 15,578 7,362 4,957 5,334 1,413 0 92,675
Advanced measurement
approach 58,032 15,578 7,362 4,957 5,334 1,413 0 92,675
Total 157,612 79,403 43,565 8,854 42,209 9,079 15,512 356,235
Employees – 252
Dec 31, 2015

Private, Consoli-
Global Investment Commercial Asset Operations Adjustments
in € m. Markets Banking Clients Management Postbank Unit and Other Total
Credit Risk 61,132 70,748 41,310 8,194 37,553 11,558 11,524 242,019
Segment reallocation (93) 2,016 1,133 272 5 71 (3,404) 0
Advanced IRBA 53,512 63,054 36,009 6,243 30,177 7,424 13,805 210,223
Central Governments
and Central Banks 3,569 993 26 1 13 6 10,013 14,619
Institutions 7,744 3,948 111 78 1,293 342 633 14,149
Corporates 32,853 53,313 7,661 277 7,701 2,620 1,034 105,459
Retail 176 39 20,877 0 18,234 655 0 39,980
Other 9,170 4,761 7,334 5,888 2,937 3,801 2,125 36,016
Foundation IRBA 2,082 175 1 0 3,075 0 0 5,333
Central Governments
and Central Banks 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Institutions 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 5
Corporates 2,082 175 1 0 3,070 0 0 5,329
Standardized Approach 4,812 5,501 4,167 1,679 4,186 4,063 1,123 25,530
Central Governments
or Central Banks 14 30 3 0 144 0 10 202
Institutions 538 34 14 1 81 2 0 671
Corporates 2,268 3,713 946 715 918 736 587 9,884
Retail 6 239 2,499 0 1,763 512 0 5,018
Other 1,985 1,485 705 962 1,279 2,813 525 9,755
Risk exposure amount
for default funds
contributions 820 2 0 0 111 0 0 933
Settlement Risk 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 9
Credit Valuation
Adjustment (CVA) 11,971 8 74 309 391 3,082 41 15,877
Internal Model Approach 11,949 8 55 307 378 3,081 2 15,780
Standardized Approach 22 0 19 2 14 1 40 97
Market Risk 32,502 1,191 6 1,262 32 14,286 275 49,553
Internal Model Approach 27,643 1,032 6 367 0 8,741 275 38,063
Standardized Approach 4,860 159 0 895 32 5,545 0 11,491
Operational Risk 54,777 14,165 8,518 2,739 5,266 3,972 487 89,923
Advanced measurement
approach 54,777 14,165 8,518 2,739 5,266 3,972 487 89,923
Total 160,391 86,112 49,909 12,504 43,242 32,898 12,326 397,382
The RWA according to CRR/CRD 4 were € 356.2 billion as of December 31, 2016, compared to € 397.4 billion at the
end of 2015. The overall decrease of € 41.1 billion largely reflects decreases in credit and market risk RWA. Credit Risk
RWA are € 21.7 billion lower mainly resulting from the sales of our Hua Xia and Abbey Life stakes as well as from
continued de-risking activities in the Non-Core Operations Unit and optimization initiatives in Corporate & Investment
Banking, including securitizations, hold book reductions and client portfolio optimization. Lower exposures mainly in
Corporate & Investment Banking and Global Markets also contributed to the decrease. The decrease in RWA for mar-
ket risk since December 31, 2015 was primarily driven by a reduction in risk levels predominantly in the Non-Core
Operations Unit and to lesser extent from lower levels of exposure in Global Markets. The € 6.5 billion reduction in
RWA for CVA was mainly driven by further de-risking of the portfolio and changes resulting from model refinements.
The increase in Operational Risk RWA was mainly driven by large operational risk events which are reflected in our
AMA model, such as settlements of regulatory matters by financial institutions partially offset by a slight decrease
in GM.
RWA calculated on CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded basis were € 357.5 billion as of December 31, 2016 compared with
€ 396.7 billion at the end of 2015. The decrease was driven by the same movements as outlined for the transitional
rules. The fully loaded RWA were € 1.3 billion higher than the risk-weighted assets under the transitional rules due to
the application under the transition rules of the equity investment grandfathering rule according to Article 495 CRR,
pursuant to which certain equity investments receive a 100 % risk weight instead of a risk weight between 190 % and
370 % determined based on Article 155 CRR that would apply under the CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded rules.
Annual Report 2016
Despite this grandfathering rule not applying under full application of the CRR/CRD 4 framework, we continue to apply
it in our CRR/CRD 4 fully loaded methodology for a limited subset of equity positions, based on our intention to mitigate
the impact of the expiration of the grandfathering rule through sales of the underlying assets or other measures prior to
its expiration at end of 2017. Our portfolio of transactions for which we will continue to apply the equity investment
grandfathering rule until year end 2017 consisted of 15 transactions as of year-end 2016 amounting to € 220 million in
exposures which will receive a 100 % risk weight instead of a risk weight between 190 % and 370 % in our CRR/
CRD 4 fully loaded RWA figure. We are closely monitoring the market and potential impacts from illiquid markets or
other similar difficulties which could make it unfeasible to exit these positions. Had we not applied the grandfathering
rule for these transactions, their fully loaded RWA would have been not more than € 816 million, and thus our Group
fully loaded RWA would have been not more than € 358.1 billion, as of December 31, 2016, rather than the Group fully
loaded RWA of € 357.5 billion that we reported on a fully loaded basis with application of the grandfathering rule. Also,
had we calculated our fully loaded CET 1 capital ratio, Tier 1 capital ratio and Total capital ratio as of December 31,
2016 using RWAs of € 358.1 billion, such capital ratios would have remained unchanged (due to rounding) at the
11.8 %, 13.1 % and 16.6 %, respectively that we reported on a fully loaded basis with application of the grandfathering
rule.
As of December 31, 2015, our portfolio of transactions for which we applied the equity investment grandfathering rule in
calculating our fully loaded RWA amounted to € 1.5 billion in exposures. Had we not applied the grandfathering rule for
these transactions, their fully loaded RWA would have been not more than € 5.4 billion, and thus our Group fully loaded
RWA would have been not more than € 400.7 billion as of December 31, 2015, rather than the Group fully loaded RWA
of € 396.7 billion that we reported on a fully loaded basis with application of the grandfathering rule. Also, had we calcu-
lated our fully loaded CET 1 capital ratio, Tier 1 capital ratio and Total capital ratio as of December 31, 2015 using
RWAs of € 400.7 billion, such capital ratios would have been 11.0 %, 12.1 % and 15.2 %, respectively, instead of the
11.1 %, 12.3 % and 15.4 %, respectively, that we reported on a fully loaded basis with application of the grandfathering
rule.
The following tables provide an analysis of key drivers for RWA movements observed for credit risk, thereof counter-
party credit risk, market and operational risk and CVA in the reporting period. The classifications of key drivers are fully
aligned with the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force (EDTF).
Development of Risk-weighted Assets for Credit Risk including Counterparty Credit Risk
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Capital Capital
in € m. Credit risk RWA requirements Credit risk RWA requirements
Credit risk RWA balance, beginning of year 242,019 19,362 244,128 19,531
Book size (8,085) (647) (4,822) (386)
Book quality (3,827) (306) (2,103) (168)
Model updates 2,328 186 728 58
Methodology and Policy (1,280) (102) (3,346) (268)
Acquisition and Disposals (12,701) (1,016) (206) (16)
Foreign exchange movements 350 28 10,378 830
Other 1,539 123 (2,738) (219)
Credit risk RWA balance, end of year 220,345 17,628 242,019 19,362
Thereof: Development of Risk-weighted Assets for Counterparty Credit Risk

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Counterparty Capital Counterparty Capital
in € m. credit risk RWA requirements credit risk RWA requirements
Counterparty credit risk RWA balance, beginning of year 37,276 2,982 41,117 3,289
Book size (2,740) (219) (6,224) (498)
Book quality 511 41 (95) (8)
Model updates 1,439 115 0 0
Methodology and Policy (60) (5) 0 0
Acquisition and Disposals (707) (57) 0 0
Foreign exchange movements (106) (8) 2,479 198
Other 0 0 0 0
Counterparty credit risk RWA balance, end of year 35,614 2,849 37,276 2,982
Employees – 252
Organic changes in our portfolio size and composition are considered in the category “Book size”. The category “Book
quality” mainly represents the effects from portfolio rating migrations, loss given default, model parameter recalibrations
as well as collateral coverage activities. “Model updates” include model refinements and advanced model roll out. RWA
movements resulting from externally, regulatory-driven changes, e.g. applying new regulations, are considered in the
“Methodology and Policy” section. “Acquisition and Disposals” is reserved to show significant exposure movements
which can be clearly assigned to new businesses or disposal-related activities. Changes that cannot be attributed to
the above categories are reflected in the category “Other”.
The decrease in RWA for credit risk by 9 % or € 21.7 billion since December 31, 2015 is predominantly driven by re-
ductions in “Acquisition and Disposals” and “Book Size”. “Acquisition and Disposal” largely reflects the sale of our Hua
Xia and Abbey Life stakes. The reduction in ”Book size” is driven by our ongoing de-risking activities in the NCOU as
well as general exposure reductions and optimization initiatives in Global Markets and Corporate & Investment Banking.
Process enhancements as well as the impact from recalibrations of our risk parameters shown in the category “Book
quality” also contributed to the reduction.
The increase in “Model updates” within the counterparty credit risk table corresponds predominantly to a revised treat-
ment of the applicable margin period of risk and general wrong way risk of specific derivatives portfolios, which was
partially offset by a refinement in the calculation of effective maturity for collateralized counterparties. The increase in
the category “Other” was mainly driven from the reversal of the 15 % threshold deduction due to the sale of our partici-
pation in Hua Xia Bank resulting in higher risk weighted assets for our deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability
and arise from temporary differences.
Development of Risk-weighted Assets for Credit Valuation Adjustment

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Capital Capital
in € m. CVA RWA requirements CVA RWA requirements
CVA RWA balance, beginning of year 15,877 1,270 21,203 1,696
Movement in risk levels (5,600) (448) (5,591) (447)
Market data changes and recalibrations 278 22 (1,552) (124)
Model updates (1,000) (80) 0 0
Methodology and policy 0 0 (77) (6)
Acquisitions and disposals 0 0 0 0
Foreign exchange movements (139) (11) 1,894 152
CVA RWA balance, end of year 9,416 753 15,877 1,270
The development of CVA RWA is broken down into a number of categories: movement in risk levels, which includes
changes to the portfolio size and composition; market data changes and calibrations, which includes changes in market
data levels and volatilities as well as recalibrations; model updates refers to changes to either the IMM credit exposure
models or the value-at-risk models that are used for CVA RWA; methodology and policy relates to changes to the
regulation. Any significant business acquisitions or disposals would be highlighted on their own.
As of December 31, 2016, the RWA for CVA amounted to € 9.4 billion, representing a decrease of € 6.5 billion (40 %)
compared with € 15.9 billion for December 31, 2015. The decrease was mainly driven by further de-risking of the port-
folio and a model update impacting the ratings used within the value at risk calculation.
Annual Report 2016
Development of Risk-weighted Assets for Market Risk

Dec 31, 2016
Total capital
in € m. VaR SVaR IRC CRM Other Total RWA requirements
Market risk RWA balance, beginning of year 6,931 17,146 11,608 2,378 11,491 49,553 3,964
Movement in risk levels (655) (1,547) (2,716) (3,553) (8,852) (17,323) (1,386)
Market data changes and recalibrations 403 0 0 0 2,018 2,421 194
Model updates/changes (57) 237 (230) 0 0 (50) (4)
Methodology and policy (665) (1,565) 0 1,475 0 (754) (60)
Acquisitions and disposals 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Foreign exchange movements 0 0 0 (27) (58) (84) (7)
Other 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Market risk RWA balance, end of year 5,957 14,271 8,662 273 4,599 33,762 2,701
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015

Market risk RWA balance, beginning of year 49,553 64,209
Movement in risk levels (17,323) (27,671)
Market data changes and recalibrations 2,421 3,919
Model updates (50) 1,501
Methodology and policy (754) 5,707
Acquisitions and disposals 0 0
Foreign exchange movements (84) 1,888
Market risk RWA balance, end of year 33,762 49,553
The analysis for market risk covers movements in our internal models for value-at-risk, stressed value-at-risk, incre-
mental risk charge and comprehensive risk measure as well as results from the market risk standardized approach,
which are captured in the table under the category “Other”. The market risk standardized approach covers trading
securitizations and nth-to-default derivatives, longevity exposures, relevant Collective Investment Undertakings and
market risk RWA from Postbank.
The market risk RWA movements due to changes in market data levels, volatilities, correlations, liquidity and ratings
are included under the “Market data changes and recalibrations” category. Changes to our market risk RWA internal
models, such as methodology enhancements or risk scope extensions, are included in the category of “Model updates”.
In the “Methodology and policy” category we reflect regulatory driven changes to our market risk RWA models and
calculations. Significant new businesses and disposals would be assigned to the line item “Acquisition and disposals”.
The impacts of “Foreign exchange movements” are only calculated for the CRM and Standardized approach methods.
As of December 31, 2016 the RWA for market risk was € 33.8 billion. The € 15.8 billion (32 %) RWA decrease for
market risk since December 31, 2015 was primarily driven by a reduction in risk levels. This resulted from significant
de-risking in the Non-Core Operations Unit, particularly impacting both the comprehensive risk measure and the mar-
ket risk standardized approach for securitizations. In addition, lower levels of exposure in Global Markets also contrib-
uted to the decrease in “Movement in risk levels” across the other market risk components.
Development of Risk-weighted Assets for Operational Risk

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Operational risk Capital Operational risk Capital
in € m. RWA requirements RWA requirements
Operational risk RWA balance, beginning of year 89,923 7,194 67,082 5,367
Loss profile changes (internal and external) 7,048 564 24,170 1,934
Expected loss development (1,798) (144) (2,216) (177)
Forward looking risk component (1,140) (91) 163 13
Model updates (358) (29) 724 58
Methodology and policy (1,000) (80) 0 0
Acquisitions and disposals 0 0 0 0
Operational risk RWA balance, end of year 92,675 7,414 89,923 7,194
Employees – 252
Changes of internal and external loss events are reflected in the category “loss profile changes”. The category “ex-
pected loss development” is based on divisional business plans and is deducted from the AMA capital figure within
certain constraints. The category “forward looking risk component” reflects qualitative adjustment and as such the
effectiveness and performance of the day-to-day operational risk management activities via Key Risk Indicators and
Self-Assessment scores, focusing on the business environment and internal control factors. The category “model up-
dates” covers model refinements such as the implementation of model changes. The category “methodology and policy”
represents externally driven changes such as regulatory add-ons. The category “acquisition and disposals” represents
significant exposure movements which can be clearly assigned to new or disposed businesses.
The overall RWA increase of € 2.8 billion was mainly driven by large operational risk events which are reflected in our
AMA model as part of “loss profile changes”, in particular through settlements of regulatory matters by financial institu-
tions. The impact of the Bank’s settlement with the Department of Justice in the United States to resolve civil claims in
connection with the bank’s issuance and underwriting of residential mortgage-backed securities and related securitiza-
tion activities between 2005 and 2007, which was announced on December 23, 2016, has been analyzed alongside
other changes to our operational risk profile in 2016 to confirm the adequacy of our capital requirements.
We have successfully implemented a model change in the first quarter concerning the modeling of the frequency distri-
bution underlying our AMA capital model replacing a previous capital add-on as shown under “model updates” in the
fourth quarter. Similarly in the fourth quarter, we have decommissioned an add-on in relation to IT risks after obtaining
supervisory approval to use refined scenarios describing potential risks in our IT environment within our model as
disclosed under “methodology and policy”.
Further impacts from the AMA model enhancements on the other operational risk RWA components are expected to
materialize alongside the implementation of model changes recently approved by the Joint Supervisory Team.
Annual Report 2016
Economic Capital
Internal Capital Adequacy
As the primary measure of our Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) we assess our internal capital
adequacy based on our “gone concern approach” as the ratio of our total capital supply divided by our total capital
demand as shown in the table below. Our capital supply definition has been further aligned with the CRR/CRD 4 capital
framework in the first quarter 2016. Consequently, goodwill and other intangible assets are now deducted from Pillar 2
capital supply, instead of being added to the capital demand. The prior year information has been revised.
Total capital supply and demand

in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Capital supply
Shareholders' equity 59,833 62,678
Fair value gains on own debt and debt valuation adjustments, subject to own credit risk 1 (440) (407)
Defined benefit pension fund assets 2 (945) (1,173)
Deferred tax assets (8,666) (7,762)
Additional valuation adjustments 3 (1,398) (1,877)
Expected loss shortfall (297) (106)
Home loans and savings protection (231) (291)
Holdings of own capital instruments (45) (62)
Fair value adjustments for assets reclassified where no matched funding is available 4 (557) (147)
Noncontrolling interests 5 0 0
Intangible assets (8,982) (10,078)
Hybrid tier 1 capital instruments 11,259 11,962
Tier 2 capital instruments 8,003 8,016
Capital supply 57,534 60,754
Total economic capital demand

Credit risk 13,105 13,685
Market risk 14,593 17,436
Operational risk 10,488 10,243
Business risk 5,098 5,931
Diversification benefit (7,846) (8,852)
Capital demand 35,438 38,442
Internal capital adequacy ratio 162 % 158 %

1 Includes deduction of fair value gains on own credit-effect relating to own liabilities designated under the fair value option as well as the debt valuation adjustments.
2 Reported as net assets (assets minus liabilities) of a defined pension fund, i.e. applicable for overfunded pension plans.
3 As applied in the regulatory capital section.
4 Includes fair value adjustments for assets reclassified in accordance with IAS 39 and for banking book assets where no matched funding is available. A positive
adjustment is not considered.
5 Includes noncontrolling interest up to the economic capital requirement for each subsidiary.
A ratio of more than 100 % signifies that the total capital supply is sufficient to cover the capital demand determined by
the risk positions. This ratio was 162 % as of December 31, 2016, compared with 158 % as of December 31, 2015.
The change of the ratio was due to the fact that capital supply decreased proportionately less than the capital demand
did. Shareholders’ equity decreased by € 2.8 billion mainly driven by lower net income attributable to our shareholders.
Hybrid Tier 1 capital instruments decreased by € 703 million mainly driven by the redemption of instruments. The de-
crease in capital demand was driven by lower economic capital requirements as explained in the section “Risk Profile”.
The above capital adequacy measures apply to the consolidated Group as a whole (including Postbank) and form an
integral part of our Risk and Capital Management framework.
Employees – 252
Leverage Ratio
We manage our balance sheet on a Group level and, where applicable, locally in each region. In the allocation of finan-
cial resources we favor business portfolios with the highest positive impact on our profitability and shareholder value.
We monitor and analyze balance sheet developments and track certain market-observed balance sheet ratios. Based
on this we trigger discussion and management action by the Group Risk Committee (GRC). Following the publication
of the CRR/CRD 4 framework, we established a leverage ratio calculation according to that framework.
Leverage Ratio according to revised CRR/CRD 4 framework (fully loaded)
The CRR/CRD 4 framework introduced a non-risk based leverage ratio that is intended to act as a supplementary
measure to the risk based capital requirements. Its objectives are to constrain the build-up of leverage in the banking
sector, helping avoid destabilizing deleveraging processes which can damage the broader financial system and the
economy, and to reinforce the risk based requirements with a simple, non-risk based “backstop” measure. While the
CRR/CRD 4 framework currently does not provide for a mandatory minimum leverage ratio to be complied with by the
relevant financial institutions, a legislative proposal published by the European Commission on November 23, 2016
suggests introducing a minimum leverage ratio of 3 %. The legislative proposal provides that the leverage ratio applies
two years after the proposal’s entry into force and remains subject to political discussion among EU institutions.
We calculate our leverage ratio exposure on a fully loaded basis in accordance with Article 429 of the CRR as per
Delegated Regulation (EU) 2015/62 of October 10, 2014 published in the Official Journal of the European Union on
January 17, 2015 amending Regulation (EU) No 575/2013.
Our total leverage ratio exposure consists of the components derivatives, securities financing transactions (SFTs), off-
balance sheet exposure and other on-balance sheet exposure (excluding derivatives and SFTs).
The leverage exposure for derivatives is calculated by using the regulatory mark-to-market method for derivatives
comprising the current replacement cost plus a regulatory defined add-on for the potential future exposure. Variation
margin received in cash from counterparties is deducted from the current replacement cost portion of the leverage ratio
exposure measure and variation margin paid to counterparties is deducted from the leverage ratio exposure measure
related to receivables recognized as an asset on the balance sheet, provided certain conditions are met. Deductions of
receivables assets for cash variation margin provided in derivatives transactions are shown under derivative exposure
in table leverage ratio common disclosure. The effective notional amount of written credit derivatives, i.e., the notional
reduced by any negative fair value changes that have been incorporated in Tier 1 capital is included in the leverage
ratio exposure measure; the resulting exposure measure is further reduced by the effective notional amount of a pur-
chased credit derivative on the same reference name provided certain conditions are met.
The SFT component includes the gross receivables for SFTs, which are netted with SFT payables if specific conditions
are met. In addition to the gross exposure a regulatory add-on for the counterparty credit risk is included.
The off-balance sheet exposure component follows the credit risk conversion factors (CCF) of the standardized ap-
proach for credit risk (0 %, 20 %, 50 %, or 100 %), which depend on the risk category subject to a floor of 10 %.
The other on-balance sheet exposure component (excluding derivatives and SFTs) reflects the accounting values of
the assets (excluding derivatives and SFTs) as well as regulatory adjustments for asset amounts deducted in determin-
ing Tier 1 capital.
The following tables show the leverage ratio exposure and the leverage ratio, both on a fully loaded basis, on the dis-
closure tables of the implementing technical standards (ITS) which were adopted by the European Commission via
Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2016/200 published in the Official Journal of the European Union on Feb-
ruary 16, 2016:
Annual Report 2016
Summary reconciliation of accounting assets and leverage ratio exposures

in € bn. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Total assets as per published financial statements 1,591 1,629
Adjustment for entities which are consolidated for accounting purposes but are outside the scope of
regulatory consolidation 0 3
Adjustments for derivative financial instruments (276) (263)
Adjustment for securities financing transactions (SFTs) 20 25
Adjustment for off-balance sheet items (i.e. conversion to credit equivalent amounts of off-balance
sheet exposures) 102 109
Other adjustments (90) (107)
Leverage ratio total exposure measure 1,348 1,395
Leverage ratio common disclosure

in € bn.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Total derivative exposures 177 215
Total securities financing transaction exposures 135 164
Total off-balance sheet exposures 102 109
Other Assets 948 924
Asset amounts deducted in determining Tier 1 capital fully loaded (15) (17)
Tier 1 capital fully loaded 46.8 48.7

Total Exposures 1,348 1,395
Leverage Ratio – using a fully loaded definition of Tier 1 capital (in %) 3.5 3.5
Description of the factors that had an impact on the leverage ratio in 2016
As of December 31, 2016, our fully loaded CRR/CRD 4 leverage ratio was 3.5 % compared to 3.5 % as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015, taking into account as of December 31, 2016 a fully loaded Tier 1 capital of € 46.8 billion over an appli-
cable exposure measure of € 1,348 billion (€ 48.7 billion and € 1,395 billion as of December 31, 2015, respectively).
Our CRR/CRD 4 leverage ratio according to transitional provisions was 4.1 % as of December 31, 2016, calculated as
Tier 1 capital according to transitional rules of € 55.5 billion over an applicable exposure measure of € 1,350 billion. The
exposure measure under transitional rules is € 2 billion higher compared to the fully loaded exposure measure as the
asset amounts deducted in determining Tier 1 capital are lower under transitional rules.
Over the year 2016, our leverage ratio exposure decreased by € 48 billion to € 1,348 billion. This principally reflects a
decrease in derivative exposures of € 38 billion primarily related to lower add-ons for potential future exposure and
effective notional amounts of written credit derivatives after offsetting. Furthermore, there was a decrease of € 29 billion
in SFT exposures reflecting the overall decrease on the balance sheet in the SFT related items (securities purchased
under resale agreements and securities borrowed, under both accrual and fair value accounting, and receivables from
prime brokerage). In addition, off-balance sheet exposures decreased by € 7 billion corresponding to lower notional
amounts for irrevocable lending commitments and contingent liabilities. The mentioned decreases in leverage ratio
exposure are partly offset by an increase of € 25 billion in other assets, principally from higher cash and central bank
balances on our balance sheet partly offset by reductions on our balance sheet in non-derivative trading assets, loans
and financial assets available for sale.
The decrease of the leverage ratio exposure in 2016 includes foreign exchange impacts of € 11 billion mainly due to
the depreciation of the euro against the U.S. dollar which was partly offset by its appreciation against the pound sterling.
Our leverage ratio calculated as the ratio of total assets under IFRS to total equity under IFRS was 25 as of Decem-
ber 31, 2016 compared to 24 as of December 31, 2015.
For main drivers of the Tier 1 capital development please refer to section “Regulatory Capital” in this report.
Employees – 252
Credit Risk Exposure

Counterparty credit exposure arises from our traditional nontrading lending activities which include elements such as
loans and contingent liabilities, as well as from our direct trading activity with clients in certain instruments including
OTC derivatives like foreign exchange forwards and Forward Rate Agreements. A default risk also arises from our
positions in equity products and traded credit products such as bonds.
We define our credit exposure by taking into account all transactions where losses might occur due to the fact that
counterparties may not fulfill their contractual payment obligations.
Maximum Exposure to Credit Risk

The maximum exposure to credit risk table shows the direct exposure before consideration of associated collateral held
and other credit enhancements (netting and hedges) that do not qualify for offset in our financial statements for the
periods specified. The netting credit enhancement component includes the effects of legally enforceable netting
agreements as well as the offset of negative mark-to-markets from derivatives against pledged cash collateral. The
collateral credit enhancement component mainly includes real estate, collateral in the form of cash as well as securities
related collateral. In relation to collateral we apply internally determined haircuts and additionally cap all collateral val-
ues at the level of the respective collateralized exposure.
Maximum Exposure to Credit Risk

Dec 31, 2016
Credit Enhancements
Maximum Guarantees
exposure and Credit Total credit
1
in € m. to credit risk 2 Netting Collateral derivatives 3 enhancements
Cash and central bank balances 181,364 0 0 0 0
Interbank balances (w/o central banks) 11,606 0 0 25 25
Central bank funds sold and securities purchased
under resale agreements 16,287 0 15,944 0 15,944
Securities borrowed 20,081 0 19,193 0 19,193
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 4 667,411 389,475 139,274 1,241 529,990
Trading assets 95,410 0 3,601 1,007 4,607
Positive market values from derivative financial
instruments 485,150 386,727 64,438 164 451,329
Financial assets designated at fair value through
profit or loss 86,850 2,748 71,235 70 74,054
thereof:
Securities purchased under resale agreement 47,404 2,748 44,591 0 47,339
Financial assets available for sale 4 54,275 0 560 28 589
Loans 5 413,455 0 210,776 30,189 240,965
Securities held to maturity 3,206 0 0 0 0
Other assets subject to credit risk 76,036 39,567 1,061 80 40,708
Financial guarantees and other credit related
contingent liabilities6 52,341 0 5,094 8,661 13,756
Irrevocable lending commitments and other
credit related commitments 6 166,063 0 8,251 7,454 15,705
Maximum exposure to credit risk 1,662,125 429,042 400,153 47,679 876,874
1 All amounts at carrying value unless otherwise indicated.
2 Does not include credit derivative notional sold (€ 744,159 million) and credit derivative notional bought protection.
3 Bought credit protection is reflected with the notional of the underlying.
4 Excludes equities, other equity interests and commodities.
5 Gross loans less deferred expense/unearned income before deductions of allowance for loan losses.
6 Figures are reflected at notional amounts.
Annual Report 2016
Dec 31, 2015

Credit Enhancements
Maximum Guarantees
exposure and Credit Total credit
in € m. 1 to credit risk 2 3
Netting Collateral derivatives enhancements
Cash and central bank balances 96,940 0 22 − 22
Interbank balances (w/o central banks) 12,842 0 57 13 70
Central bank funds sold and securities purchased
under resale agreements 22,456 0 22,037 0 22,037
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 4 734,449 409,317 152,858 699 562,874
Trading assets 119,991 0 4,615 519 5,134
instruments 515,594 407,171 69,008 106 476,285
profit or loss 98,864 2,146 79,235 74 81,455
thereof:
Securities purchased under resale agreement 51,073 2,146 47,664 0 49,811
Financial assets available for sale 4 71,368 0 760 − 760
Loans 5 432,777 0 207,923 30,188 238,111
Other assets subject to credit risk 78,978 58,478 386 365 59,229
Financial guarantees and other credit related
contingent liabilities6 57,325 0 5,730 8,166 13,897
credit related commitments 6 174,549 0 6,973 6,275 13,248
Maximum exposure to credit risk 1,715,241 467,795 428,777 45,707 942,279
2 Does not include credit derivative notional sold (€ 655,584 million) and credit derivative notional bought protection.
3 Bought credit protection is reflected with the notional of the underlying.
The overall decrease in maximum exposure to credit risk for December 31, 2016 was driven by a € 30.4 billion de-
crease in positive market values from derivative financial instruments, € 24.6 billion decrease in trading assets,
€ 19.3 billion decrease in loans, € 17.1 billion decrease in financial assets available for sale and € 12.0 billion decrease
in financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss during the period, partly offset by a € 84.4 billion in-
crease in cash and central bank balances.
Included in the category of trading assets as of December 31, 2016, were traded bonds of € 81.3 billion (€ 103.2 billion
as of December 31, 2015) that is over 81 % investment-grade (over 79 % as of December 31, 2015). The above men-
tioned financial assets available for sale category primarily reflected debt securities of which more than 98 % were
investment-grade (more than 95 % as of December 31, 2015).
Credit Enhancements are split into three categories: netting, collateral, guarantees and credit derivatives. A prudent
approach is taken with respect to haircuts, parameter setting for regular margin calls as well as expert judgments for
collateral valuation to prevent market developments from leading to a build-up of uncollateralized exposures. All cate-
gories are monitored and reviewed regularly. Overall credit enhancements received are diversified and of adequate
quality being largely cash, highly rated government bonds and third-party guarantees mostly from well rated banks and
insurance companies. These financial institutions are mainly domiciled in Western European countries and the United
States. Furthermore we have collateral pools of highly liquid assets and mortgages (principally consisting of residential
properties mainly in Germany) for the homogeneous retail portfolio.
Employees – 252
Credit Quality of Financial Instruments neither Past Due nor Impaired

We derive our credit quality from internal ratings and group our exposures into classes as shown below. Please refer to
section “Measuring Credit Risk” for more details about our internal ratings.
Credit Quality of Financial Instruments neither Past Due nor Impaired

Dec 31, 2016
iCCC
1
in € m. iAAA–iAA iA iBBB iBB iB and below Total
Cash and central bank balances 174,978 4,241 1,778 238 81 47 181,364
Interbank balances (w/o central banks) 5,546 3,452 1,612 689 112 195 11,606
Central bank funds sold and securities
purchased under resale agreements 3,542 7,734 1,028 2,624 1,338 22 16,287
Securities borrowed 16,036 2,882 802 343 18 0 20,081
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 2 277,645 258,627 61,162 52,904 11,183 5,889 667,411
Trading assets 46,398 10,956 12,024 17,729 5,833 2,471 95,410
instruments 188,037 234,491 38,113 19,138 3,297 2,073 485,150
profit or loss 43,211 13,180 11,024 16,037 2,053 1,344 86,850
thereof:
Securities purchased under resale agreement 13,622 10,684 7,401 13,667 1,165 866 47,404
Financial assets available for sale 2 42,808 6,616 2,106 577 72 254 52,433
Loans 3 44,116 52,421 127,682 121,213 42,941 14,273 402,645
thereof:
IAS 39 reclassified loans 54 28 341 26 68 87 604
Securities held to maturity 3,206 0 0 0 0 0 3,206
Other assets subject to credit risk 26,594 25,791 9,656 13,091 630 273 76,036
Financial guarantees and other
credit related contingent liabilities 4 5,699 13,712 16,753 9,663 4,477 2,038 52,341
credit related commitments 4 21,479 45,635 47,480 29,274 18,173 4,022 166,063
Total 621,650 421,112 270,058 230,615 79,025 27,013 1,649,473
4
Figures are reflected at notional amounts.
Annual Report 2016
Dec 31, 2015

iCCC
in € m. 1 iAAA–iAA iA iBBB iBB iB and below Total
Cash and central bank balances 91,154 2,377 1,918 1,311 68 111 96,940
Interbank balances (w/o central banks) 4,606 5,450 877 957 18 935 12,842
Central bank funds sold and securities
purchased under resale agreements 3,607 15,590 1,870 1,234 37 118 22,456
Securities borrowed 24,306 5,380 1,461 2,361 49 0 33,557
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 2 287,102 302,873 65,479 59,148 13,177 6,669 734,449
Trading assets 55,319 14,526 15,837 24,971 5,558 3,780 119,991
instruments 184,183 271,328 36,100 17,265 4,894 1,824 515,594
profit or loss 47,601 17,019 13,543 16,912 2,724 1,065 98,864
thereof:
Securities purchased under resale agreement 15,371 10,120 10,053 13,699 968 863 51,073
Financial assets available for sale 2 59,157 4,519 2,070 3,404 159 219 69,528
Loans 3 52,022 59,376 123,334 136,404 40,348 9,387 420,871
thereof:
IAS 39 reclassified loans 1,672 461 878 627 76 397 4,110
Other assets subject to credit risk 30,724 26,465 6,924 13,615 941 308 78,978
Financial guarantees and other
credit related contingent liabilities 4 6,384 15,464 18,283 10,827 4,668 1,700 57,325
credit related commitments 4 23,035 46,220 44,603 37,643 21,212 1,834 174,549
Total 582,099 483,714 266,820 266,904 80,678 21,282 1,701,495
The overall decline in total credit exposure of € 52.0 billion for December 31, 2016 is mainly due to an decrease in posi-
tive market value from derivative financial instruments in investment-grade rating categories, mainly in the category iA.
Main Credit Exposure Categories

The tables in this section show details about several of our main credit exposure categories, namely loans, irrevocable
lending commitments, contingent liabilities, over-the-counter (“OTC”) derivatives, traded loans, traded bonds, debt
securities available for sale and repo and repo-style transactions:
‒ “Loans” are net loans as reported on our balance sheet at amortized cost but before deduction of our allowance for
loan losses.
‒ “Irrevocable lending commitments” consist of the undrawn portion of irrevocable lending-related commitments.
‒ “Contingent liabilities” consist of financial and performance guarantees, standby letters of credit and other similar
arrangements (mainly indemnity agreements).
‒ “OTC derivatives” are our credit exposures from over-the-counter derivative transactions that we have entered into,
after netting and cash collateral received. On our balance sheet, these are included in financial assets at fair value
through profit or loss or, for derivatives qualifying for hedge accounting, in other assets, in either case, before netting
and cash collateral received.
‒ “Traded loans” are loans that are bought and held for the purpose of selling them in the near term, or the material
risks of which have all been hedged or sold. From a regulatory perspective this category principally covers trading
book positions.
Employees – 252
‒ “Traded bonds” include bonds, deposits, notes or commercial paper that are bought and held for the purpose of
selling them in the near term. From a regulatory perspective this category principally covers trading book positions.
‒ “Debt securities available for sale” include debentures, bonds, deposits, notes or commercial paper, which are
issued for a fixed term and redeemable by the issuer, which we have classified as available for sale.
‒ “Repo and repo-style transactions” consist of reverse repurchase transactions, as well as securities or commodities
borrowing transactions before application of netting and collateral received.
Although considered in the monitoring of maximum credit exposures, the following are not included in the details of our
main credit exposure: brokerage and securities related receivables, cash and central bank balances, interbank bal-
ances (without central banks), assets held for sale, accrued interest receivables, traditional securitization positions as
well as equity investments.
Main Credit Exposure Categories by Business Divisions

Dec 31, 2016
Irrevocable
lending Repo and
commit- Contingent OTC Traded Traded Debt repo-style
1
in € m. Loans ments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Loans Bonds securities 4 transactions 5 Total
Global
Markets 62,567 22,006 656 42,711 11,240 72,180 3,296 91,561 306,216
Corporate &
Investment
Banking 82,620 126,593 48,123 520 1,756 162 272 6,574 266,619
Private,
Wealth and
Commercial
Clients 159,658 9,139 2,664 317 0 1 139 0 171,918
Deutsche
Asset
Management 343 55 21 27 7 2,569 26 0 3,047
Postbank 104,728 7,837 320 420 0 0 17,220 4,290 134,816
Non-Core
Operations
Unit 3,133 131 434 175 191 257 0 34 4,355
Consolidation
& Adjustments
and Other 407 302 123 24 0 6,124 33,768 2,450 43,197
Total 413,455 166,063 52,341 44,193 13,193 81,293 54,722 104,909 930,169
1 Includes impaired loans amounting to € 7.4 billion as of December 31, 2016.
2 Includes irrevocable lending commitments related to consumer credit exposure of € 10.3 billion as of December 31, 2016.
3 Includes the effect of netting agreements and cash collateral received where applicable. Excludes derivatives qualifying for hedge accounting.
4
Includes debt securities on financial assets available for sale and securities held to maturity.
5 Before reflection of collateral and limited to securities purchased under resale agreements and securities borrowed.
Annual Report 2016
Dec 31, 2015

Irrevocable Debt
lending securities Repo and
commit- Contingent OTC Traded Traded available repo-style
1
in € m. Loans ments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Loans Bonds for sale transactions 4 Total
Global
Markets 58,092 25,467 1,292 44,824 13,905 85,454 3,454 110,581 343,069
Corporate &
Investment
Banking 97,280 129,420 51,005 503 1,176 147 326 9,986 289,843
Private,
Wealth and
Commercial
Clients 163,772 11,383 3,738 314 0 13 161 0 179,381
Deutsche
Asset
Management 265 63 22 406 10 4,296 3,281 0 8,343
Postbank 103,525 5,798 336 344 0 0 17,128 7,132 134,263
Non-Core
Operations
Unit 9,335 1,642 784 2,625 368 6,934 1,932 14 23,634
Consolidation
& Adjustments
and Other 508 775 149 37 0 6,368 41,985 862 50,684
Total 432,777 174,549 57,325 49,053 15,459 103,212 68,266 128,575 1,029,215
As part of our resegmentation all Treasury activities have been moved in 2016 into Consolidation & Adjustments. The
main contributor to the credit exposures included in Consolidation & Adjustments is Treasury liquidity reserves. Finan-
cial resources associated with Treasury activities are allocated to the divisional total assets and not at an individual
asset line. This allocation in the main credit exposure categories would reduce the total credit exposure in Consolida-
tion & Adjustment to € 8.9 billion as of December 31, 2016 and € 9.2 billion as of December 31, 2015 and would in-
crease the other divisional totals respectively.
Our main credit exposure decreased by € 99.0 billion.
‒ From a divisional perspective decreases in exposure are observed across all divisions except Postbank. Our expo-
sure in Global Markets decreased by € 36.9 billion and in Corporate & Investment Banking by € 23.2 billion. Our
Non-Core Operations Unit achieved a managed reduction of € 19.3 billion.
‒ From a product perspective strong exposure reductions have been observed for repo and repo-style transactions,
traded bonds, loans, and debt securities.
Employees – 252
Main Credit Exposure Categories by Industry Sectors

Dec 31, 2016
Irrevocable
lending Repo and
1
in € m. Loans ments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Loans Bonds securities 4 transactions 5 Total
Financial
intermediation 49,630 31,296 10,189 22,554 3,115 19,580 16,452 104,095 256,911
Fund management
activities 26,062 6,843 53 1,441 115 1,322 183 59 36,077
Manufacturing 29,932 41,801 15,067 2,850 1,658 2,368 302 2 93,980
Wholesale and
retail trade 16,733 10,473 5,607 518 443 556 30 0 34,360
Households 187,862 9,936 1,267 652 105 2 0 0 199,825
Commercial real
estate activities 27,324 4,372 512 1,780 2,015 861 78 67 37,008
Public sector 15,707 1,795 189 6,457 629 47,265 35,515 480 108,037
Other 60,206 59,548 19,456 7,941 5,114 9,339 2,162 205 163,972
Total 413,455 166,063 52,341 44,193 13,193 81,293 54,722 104,909 930,169
4 Includes debt securities on financial assets available for sale and securities held to maturity.
Dec 31, 2015

Irrevocable Debt
in € m. Loans 1,2 ments 2,3 liabilities derivatives 4 Loans Bonds for sale transactions 5 Total
Financial
intermediation 61,357 33,391 11,717 26,539 3,815 24,761 23,772 124,340 309,692
Fund management
activities 25,923 8,952 381 1,601 118 2,303 461 237 39,976
Manufacturing 27,937 40,969 17,192 2,885 1,500 2,341 314 − 93,137
Wholesale and
retail trade 18,209 12,594 5,424 1,038 499 564 95 1 38,423
Households 200,818 11,638 2,013 719 128 − 0 34 215,350
Commercial real
estate activities 22,578 4,803 681 1,812 3,429 738 205 40 34,285
Public sector 17,113 2,510 280 6,170 491 55,774 39,085 2,242 123,664
Other 58,842 59,692 19,636 8,289 5,478 16,731 4,333 1,680 174,688
Total 432,777 174,549 57,325 49,053 15,459 103,212 68,266 128,575 1,029,215
2 Comparatives have been restated to reflect changes in industry sectors.
The above table gives an overview of our credit exposure by industry, allocated based on the NACE code of the coun-
terparty we are doing business with.
From an industry perspective, our credit exposure is lower compared with last year mainly due to a decrease in Finan-
cial intermediation of € 52.8 billion and Public sector of € 15.6 billion, driven by lower Repo and repo style transactions
and traded bonds exposure, as well as decrease in the Households category by € 15.5 billion mainly attributable to
reduced loan exposure.
Loan exposures to the industry sectors financial intermediation, manufacturing and public sector comprise predomi-
nantly investment-grade loans. The portfolio is subject to the same credit underwriting requirements stipulated in our
“Principles for Managing Credit Risk”, including various controls according to single name, country, industry and prod-
uct-specific concentration.
Material transactions, such as loans underwritten with the intention to syndicate, are subject to review by senior credit
risk management professionals and (depending upon size) an underwriting credit committee and/or the Management
Annual Report 2016
Board. High emphasis is placed on structuring such transactions so that de-risking is achieved in a timely and cost
effective manner. Exposures within these categories are mostly to good quality borrowers and also subject to further
risk mitigation as outlined in the description of our Credit Portfolio Strategies Group’s activities.
Our household loans exposure amounting to € 187.9 billion as of December 31, 2016 (€ 200.8 billion as of December
2015) is principally associated with our PCC and Postbank portfolios. € 150.6 billion (80 %) of the portfolio comprises
mortgages, of which € 119.5 billion are held in Germany. The remaining exposures (€ 37.6 billion, 20 %) are predomi-
nantly consumer finance business related. Given the largely homogeneous nature of this portfolio, counterparty credit
worthiness and ratings are predominately derived by utilizing an automated decision engine.
Mortgage business is principally the financing of owner occupied properties sold by various business channels in Eu-
rope, primarily in Germany but also in Spain, Italy and Poland, with exposure normally not exceeding real estate value.
Consumer finance is divided into personal installment loans, credit lines and credit cards. Various lending requirements
are stipulated, including (but not limited to) maximum loan amounts and maximum tenors and are adapted to regional
conditions and/or circumstances of the borrower (i.e., for consumer loans a maximum loan amount taking into account
household net income). Interest rates are mostly fixed over a certain period of time, especially in Germany. Second lien
loans are not actively pursued.
The level of credit risk of the mortgage loan portfolio is determined by assessing the quality of the client and the under-
lying collateral. The loan amounts are generally larger than consumer finance loans and they are extended for longer
time horizons. Consumer finance loan risk depends on client quality. Given that they are uncollateralized, compared
with mortgages they are also smaller in value and are extended for shorter time. Based on our underwriting criteria and
processes, diversified portfolio (customers/properties) and low loan-to-value (LTV) ratios, the mortgage portfolio is
categorized as lower risk and consumer finance medium risk.
Our commercial real estate loans, primarily in the US and Europe, are generally secured by first mortgages on the
underlying real estate property. Credit underwriting policy guidelines provide that LTV ratios of generally less than 75 %
are maintained. Additionally, given the significance of the underlying collateral independent external appraisals are
commissioned for all secured loans by our valuation team (part of the independent Credit Risk Management function)
which is also responsible for reviewing and challenging the reported real estate values regularly.
The Commercial Real Estate Group only in exceptional cases retains mezzanine or other junior tranches of debt (alt-
hough we do underwrite mezzanine loans), also the Postbank portfolio holds an insignificant sub-portfolio of junior
tranches. Loans originated for distribution are carefully monitored under a pipeline limit. Securitized loan positions are
entirely sold (except where regulation requires retention of economic risk), while we frequently retain a portion of syndi-
cated bank loans. This hold portfolio, which is held at amortized cost, is also subject to the aforementioned principles
and policy guidelines. We also participate in conservatively underwritten unsecured lines of credit to well-capitalized
real estate investment trusts and other public companies, which are generally investment-grade. We provide both fixed
rate (generally securitized product) and floating rate loans, with interest rate exposure subject to hedging arrangements.
In addition, sub-performing and non-performing loans and pools of loans are acquired from other financial institutions at
generally substantial discounts to both the notional amounts and current collateral values. The underwriting process for
these is stringent and the exposure is managed under separate portfolio limits. Exposures within NCOU have been
further reduced over the course of the year and account for less than 3 % of the entire Commercial Real Estate portfo-
lio as of December 31, 2016. Commercial real estate property valuations and rental incomes can be significantly im-
pacted by macro-economic conditions and underlying properties to idiosyncratic events. Accordingly, the portfolio is
categorized as higher risk and hence subject to the aforementioned tight restrictions on concentration.
The category Other loans, with exposure of € 60.2 billion as of December 31, 2016 (€ 58.8 billion as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015) relates to numerous smaller industry sectors with no individual sector greater than 6 % of total loans.
Our credit exposure to our ten largest counterparties accounted for 7 % of our aggregated total credit exposure in these
categories as of December 31, 2016 compared with 6 % as of December 31, 2015. Our top ten counterparty expo-
sures were with well-rated counterparties or otherwise related to structured trades which show high levels of risk miti-
gation.
Employees – 252
Our credit exposure to each of the focus industries “Oil and Gas”, “Metals, Mining & Steel” and “Shipping” is less than
2 % of our total credit exposure.
Our loan exposure to the “Oil & Gas” industry is approximately € 8 billion. Around 50 % of our credit exposure is to
investment-grade rated borrowers, mainly in the more resilient segments Oil Majors and National Oil & Gas companies.
Less than 25 % of our “Oil & Gas” credit portfolio is to sectors that we consider higher risk and more impacted by the
low oil price, namely sub-investment-grade Exploration & Production (predominantly senior secured) and Oil & Gas
Services & Equipment segments.
Our loan exposure in our “Metals, Mining and Steel” portfolio is approximately € 6 billion. This portfolio is of lower quali-
ty compared to our overall Corporate credit portfolio, and has an investment-grade ratio of just 27 %. In line with the
structure of the industry, a significant share of our portfolio is in Emerging Markets countries. Our strategy is to reduce
this credit portfolio due to elevated risks of this industry, namely material oversupply with resulting pressure on prices
and margins.
Our loan exposure to “Shipping” accounts for approximately € 5 billion and is largely collateralized. The portfolio is
diversified across ship types with global associated risks due to diversified trading income though the counterparties
mainly domiciled in Europe. A high proportion of the portfolio is sub investment grade rated in reflection of the pro-
longed challenging market conditions over recent years. Exposure to the German “KG” sector (non-recourse financing
of vessels via closed end funds) is less than 10 % of the total Shipping exposure.
Main credit exposure categories by geographical region

Dec 31, 2016
Irrevocable
lending Repo and
in € m. Loans 1 ments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Loans Bonds securities 4 transactions 5 Total
Germany 197,368 27,954 11,511 2,636 236 3,070 12,970 5,571 261,316
Western Europe
(excluding Germany) 96,297 36,496 15,798 22,852 2,800 19,565 26,755 18,811 239,375
thereof:
France 2,703 5,854 1,373 1,436 216 2,255 4,866 1,830 20,534
Luxembourg 19,312 2,998 575 1,521 330 1,228 7,179 372 33,515
Netherlands 8,934 6,370 1,749 3,270 224 2,164 4,143 474 27,328
United Kingdom 7,942 7,331 1,422 7,925 519 4,224 1,929 9,327 40,620
Eastern Europe 9,664 1,475 1,437 456 1,121 1,288 1,713 36 17,191
thereof:
Poland 7,402 702 208 65 6 281 1,542 0 10,205
Russia 836 432 425 38 645 174 77 0 2,626
North America 69,921 92,699 12,013 12,162 6,471 36,332 11,444 61,771 302,814
thereof:
Canada 2,247 2,288 163 1,723 112 628 249 95 7,505
Cayman Islands 2,993 1,045 86 725 37 1,215 24 11,679 17,804
U.S. 56,567 87,503 11,336 9,307 6,181 30,961 10,843 47,528 260,225
Central and South
America 5,338 1,113 1,196 1,020 621 1,975 202 890 12,356
thereof:
Brazil 1,655 178 626 207 61 843 179 594 4,342
Mexico 618 414 170 299 73 561 0 10 2,145
Asia/Pacific 31,644 5,782 9,958 4,753 1,606 18,525 1,425 17,515 91,208
thereof:
China 2,953 722 1,113 446 11 687 0 1,945 7,877
Japan 888 299 350 941 95 3,932 17 9,002 15,522
South Korea 1,393 59 767 692 0 1,609 0 0 4,521
Africa 2,045 421 387 164 335 419 0 314 4,085
Other 1,178 122 40 150 3 119 212 0 1,825
Total 413,455 166,063 52,341 44,193 13,193 81,293 54,722 104,909 930,169
2 Includes irrevocable lending commitments related to consumer credit exposure of €10.3 billion as of December 31, 2016.
4
Includes debt securities on financial assets available for sale and securities held to maturity.
Annual Report 2016
Dec 31, 2015

Irrevocable Debt
1
in € m. Loans ments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Loans Bonds for sale transactions 4 Total
Germany 203,387 23,621 11,663 3,044 530 5,065 20,080 6,568 273,957
Western Europe
(excluding Germany) 100,414 42,700 17,525 21,156 3,237 21,463 37,684 30,240 274,420
thereof:
France 2,335 5,904 1,535 1,015 279 3,445 6,875 3,514 24,901
Luxembourg 19,890 3,140 648 1,629 481 1,746 9,937 318 37,790
Netherlands 10,405 5,851 2,348 3,498 297 2,508 6,243 456 31,606
United Kingdom 8,828 9,880 1,608 6,161 508 4,614 4,762 16,352 52,713
Eastern Europe 10,319 1,946 1,650 450 1,409 2,738 244 55 18,811
thereof:
Poland 7,434 705 281 50 − 1,640 85 − 10,195
Russia 1,295 533 583 42 953 113 − 1 3,520
North America 72,008 96,310 14,154 14,468 6,784 50,842 7,890 74,061 336,517
thereof:
Canada 1,481 2,391 590 1,764 54 1,016 659 1,676 9,631
Cayman Islands 2,882 1,931 91 919 149 1,724 62 12,459 20,216
U.S. 60,991 90,773 12,966 11,367 6,146 47,786 7,158 58,496 295,683
Central and South
6,506 1,111 1,218 1,706 731 2,345 25 1,240 14,883
America
thereof:
Brazil 2,267 344 587 458 53 1,191 4 526 5,430
Mexico 731 102 91 331 107 363 19 378 2,121
Asia/Pacific 37,202 7,685 10,321 7,901 2,201 20,372 2,075 14,794 102,551
thereof:
China 5,646 1,005 954 571 32 976 − 964 10,149
Japan 848 336 357 1,348 41 3,930 22 5,556 12,438
South Korea 2,158 16 919 1,000 0 1,359 8 − 5,460
Africa 2,123 501 537 300 227 324 100 351 4,464
Other 817 674 258 29 340 62 166 1,266 3,612
Total 432,777 174,549 57,325 49,053 15,459 103,212 68,266 128,575 1,029,215
The above table gives an overview of our credit exposure by geographical region, allocated based on the counterpar-
ty’s country of domicile, see also section “Credit Exposure to Certain Eurozone Countries” of this report for a detailed
discussion of the “country of domicile view”.
Our largest concentration of credit risk within loans from a regional perspective is in our home market Germany, with a
significant share in households, which includes the majority of our mortgage lending business.
Within the OTC derivatives business, tradable assets as well as repo and repo-style transactions, our largest concen-
trations from a regional perspective were in Western Europe (excluding Germany) and North America. From the indus-
try perspective, exposures from OTC derivative as well as repo and repo-style transactions have a significant share in
highly rated financial intermediation companies. For tradable assets, a large proportion of exposure is also with public
sector companies.
As of December 31, 2016, our loan book decreased to € 413.5 billion (compared to € 432.8 billion as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015) mainly as a result of lower levels of exposures in Germany and Asia Pacific. Our households and finan-
cial intermediation loan books experienced the largest decreases. The decrease in loans in Germany and United
States was mainly driven by managed reductions in Corporate & Investment Banking and Non-Core Operations Unit
that were conducted in order to reduce risk weighted assets. Repo and Repo style transactions decreased by
€ 23.7 billion mainly in North America and Western Europe (excluding Germany). This decline was driven by reductions
in both our client balance sheet and firm financing needs as well as by reduced short coverage requirements.
Employees – 252
Credit Exposure to Certain Eurozone Countries

Certain eurozone countries are presented within the table below due to concerns relating to sovereign risk.
In our “country of domicile view” we aggregate credit risk exposures to counterparties by allocating them to the domicile
of the primary counterparty, irrespective of any link to other counterparties, or in relation to credit default swaps under-
lying reference assets from, these eurozone countries. Hence we also include counterparties whose group parent is
located outside of these countries and exposures to special purpose entities whose underlying assets are from entities
domiciled in other countries.
The following table, which is based on the country of domicile view, presents our gross position, the included amount
thereof of undrawn exposure and our net exposure to these eurozone countries. The gross exposure reflects our net
credit risk exposure grossed up for net credit derivative protection purchased with underlying reference assets domi-
ciled in one of these countries, guarantees received and collateral. Such collateral is particularly held with respect to
the retail portfolio, but also for financial institutions predominantly based on derivative margining arrangements, as well
as for corporates. In addition the amounts also reflect the allowance for credit losses. In some cases, our counterpar-
ties’ ability to draw on undrawn commitments is limited by terms included in the specific contractual documentation. Net
credit exposures are presented after effects of collateral held, guarantees received and further risk mitigation, including
net notional amounts of credit derivatives for protection sold/(bought). The provided gross and net exposures to certain
European countries do not include credit derivative tranches and credit derivatives in relation to our correlation busi-
ness which, by design, is structured to be credit risk neutral. Additionally the tranche and correlated nature of these
positions does not allow a meaningful disaggregated notional presentation by country, e.g., as identical notional expo-
sures represent different levels of risk for different tranche levels.
Gross position, included undrawn exposure and net exposure to certain eurozone countries – Country of Domicile View
Sovereign Financial Institutions Corporates Retail Other Total
Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31, Dec 31,
in € m. 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 1 2015
Greece
Gross 89 0 743 732 986 1,539 6 7 0 0 1,824 2,277
Undrawn 0 0 31 23 21 118 0 0 0 0 52 142
Net 83 0 258 237 15 95 1 1 0 0 357 333
Ireland
Gross 826 459 908 998 9,280 8,752 31 35 3,263 2 4,361 2 14,308 14,605
Undrawn 0 0 42 23 2,000 2,568 1 0 172 2 393 2 2,214 2,984
Net 569 28 352 528 5,374 5,327 5 5 3,459 2 4,347 2 9,759 10,235
Italy
Gross 2,735 4,048 3,051 2,421 10,591 10,642 17,122 17,841 358 470 33,857 35,421
Undrawn 32 25 74 73 4,730 4,622 208 148 26 24 5,069 4,892
Net 438 507 920 754 7,514 7,093 7,288 6,989 344 448 16,504 15,792
Portugal
Gross 61 112 127 260 1,424 1,509 1,674 1,743 65 59 3,352 3,684
Undrawn 0 0 12 22 232 210 12 25 0 0 256 258
Net 79 64 73 181 1,205 1,111 143 202 65 59 1,564 1,616
Spain
Gross 1,325 729 1,947 1,292 8,340 9,350 9,770 9,928 112 257 21,493 21,556
Undrawn 0 0 261 203 4,310 4,235 283 298 3 14 4,858 4,750
Net 1,195 757 971 516 6,643 6,838 1,935 1,872 265 476 11,009 10,458
Total gross 5,037 5,348 6,776 5,703 30,621 31,792 28,603 29,553 3,797 5,147 74,835 77,544
Total undrawn 33 25 419 344 11,292 11,754 504 472 202 431 12,449 13,026
Total net 3 2,364 1,356 2,574 2,216 20,751 20,463 9,371 9,069 4,133 5,330 39,194 38,434
1 Approximately 68 % of the overall exposure as per December 31, 2016 will mature within the next 5 years.
2 Other exposures to Ireland include exposures to counterparties where the domicile of the group parent is located outside of Ireland as well as exposures to special
purpose entities whose underlying assets are from entities domiciled in other countries.
3 Total net exposure excludes credit valuation reserves for derivatives amounting to € 281 million as of December 31, 2016 and € 159 million as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015.
Total net exposure to the above selected eurozone countries increased by € 760 million in 2016 driven by exposure
increases in Italy and Spain, partly offset by a decrease in Ireland.
Annual Report 2016
Sovereign Credit Risk Exposure to Certain Eurozone Countries

The amounts below reflect a net “country of domicile view” of our sovereign exposure.
Sovereign credit risk exposure to certain eurozone countries

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Memo Item: Net Memo Item: Net
Direct Net Notional of fair value of CDS Direct Net Notional of fair value of CDS
Sovereign CDS referencing Net sovereign referencing Sovereign CDS referencing Net sovereign referencing
in € m. exposure 1 sovereign debt exposure sovereign debt 2 exposure 1 sovereign debt exposure sovereign debt 2
Greece 89 (6) 83 2 0 0 0 0
Ireland 569 0 569 74 55 (28) 28 1
Italy 2,662 (2,223) 438 398 3,989 (3,482) 507 36
Portugal 61 17 79 (8) 112 (48) 64 (9)
Spain 1,322 (127) 1,195 279 725 32 757 (12)
Total 4,703 (2,339) 2,364 744 4,881 (3,526) 1,356 17
1 Includes sovereign debt classified as financial assets/liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, available for sale and loans carried at amortized cost.
2 The amounts reflect the net fair value in relation to credit default swaps referencing sovereign debt of the respective country representing the counterparty
credit risk.
The increase of € 1.0 billion in net sovereign exposure compared with year-end 2015 mainly reflects increases in debt
securities in Ireland and Spain.
The above represents direct sovereign exposure included the carrying value of loans held at amortized cost to sover-
eigns, which as of December 31, 2016, amounted to € 261 million for Italy and € 401 million for Spain and as of De-
cember 31,2015 amounted to € 273 million for Italy and € 478 million for Spain.
Credit Exposure Classification

We also classify our credit exposure under two broad headings: consumer credit exposure and corporate credit expo-
sure.
‒ Our consumer credit exposure consists of our smaller-balance standardized homogeneous loans, primarily in Ger-
many, Italy and Spain, which include personal loans, residential and non-residential mortgage loans, overdrafts and
loans to self-employed and small business customers of our private and retail business.
‒ Our corporate credit exposure consists of all exposures not defined as consumer credit exposure.
Corporate Credit Exposure

The tables below show our Corporate Credit Exposure by product types and internal rating bands. Please refer to
section "Measuring Credit Risk" for more details about our internal ratings.
Main corporate credit exposure categories according to our internal creditworthiness categories of our counterparties – gross
in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2016
Irrevocable
Probability lending Contingent OTC
Ratingband of default in % 1 Loans commitments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 Debt securities 4 Total
iAAA–iAA > 0.00 ≤ 0.04 43,149 21,479 5,699 16,408 46,014 132,749
iA > 0.04 ≤ 0.11 39,734 45,635 13,712 12,566 6,616 118,264
iBBB > 0.11 ≤ 0.5 57,287 47,480 16,753 8,300 1,696 131,515
iBB > 0.5 ≤ 2.27 46,496 29,274 9,663 5,333 366 91,132
iB > 2.27 ≤ 10.22 22,920 18,173 4,477 1,053 9 46,631
iCCC and below > 10.22 ≤ 100 15,069 4,022 2,038 533 21 21,683
Total 224,655 166,063 52,341 44,193 54,722 541,974
1 Reflects the probability of default for a one year time horizon.
3 Includes the effect of netting agreements and cash collateral received where applicable.
4 Includes debt securities on financial assets available for sale and securities held to maturity.
Employees – 252
in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2015
Irrevocable Debt securities
Probability lending Contingent OTC available
Ratingband of default in % 1 Loans commitments 2 liabilities derivatives 3 for sale Total
iAAA–iAA > 0.00 ≤ 0.04 50,712 23,035 6,384 22,753 59,157 162,042
iA > 0.04 ≤ 0.11 49,197 46,220 15,464 10,998 4,515 126,394
iBBB > 0.11 ≤ 0.5 62,044 44,603 18,283 7,871 1,911 134,711
iBB > 0.5 ≤ 2.27 51,454 37,643 10,827 5,358 2,621 107,904
iB > 2.27 ≤ 10.22 20,610 21,212 4,668 1,558 57 48,105
iCCC and below > 10.22 ≤ 100 9,853 1,834 1,700 515 4 13,906
Total 243,871 174,548 57,325 49,053 68,266 593,063
3 Includes the effect of netting agreements and cash collateral received where applicable.
The above table shows an overall decrease in our corporate credit exposure in 2016 of € 51.1 billion or 8.6 %. Loans
decreased by € 19.2 billion, mainly attributable to Germany and Asia/Pacific. The decrease is mainly due to managed
reductions in Corporate & Investment Banking and our Non-Core Operations Unit with the aim to reduce risk weighted
assets. Debt securities decreased by € 13.5 billion, almost entirely related to the top rating band, mainly driven by sale
activity in Strategic Liquidity Reserve bond positions with the intention of reducing risk weighted assets. The decrease
in irrevocable lending commitments of € 8.5 billion was primarily attributable to Western Europe (excluding Germany),
North America and Asia/Pacific partly offset by an increase in Germany. The quality of the corporate credit exposure
before risk mitigation has remained stable at 71 % share of investment-grade rated exposures compared to Decem-
ber 31, 2015.
We use risk mitigation techniques as described above to optimize our corporate credit exposure and reduce potential
credit losses. The tables below disclose the development of our corporate credit exposure net of collateral, guarantees
and hedges.
Main corporate credit exposure categories according to our internal creditworthiness categories of our counterparties – net
in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2016 1
Irrevocable
Probability lending Contingent OTC
2
Rating band of default in % Loans commitments liabilities derivatives Debt securities Total
iAAA–iAA > 0.00 ≤ 0.04 32,305 19,653 4,351 10,480 46,014 112,802
iA > 0.04 ≤ 0.11 24,970 41,435 11,393 10,032 6,616 94,448
iBBB > 0.11 ≤ 0.5 28,369 43,659 13,845 7,439 1,672 94,984
iBB > 0.5 ≤ 2.27 19,573 27,206 5,932 4,034 361 57,105
iB > 2.27 ≤ 10.22 8,090 16,745 2,176 1,020 9 28,041
iCCC and below > 10.22 ≤ 100 5,954 2,872 889 509 21 10,246
Total 119,261 151,571 38,586 33,514 54,694 397,626
1 Net of eligible collateral, guarantees and hedges based on IFRS requirements.
in € m.
(unless stated otherwise) Dec 31, 2015 1
Irrevocable Debt securities
Probability lending Contingent OTC available
Rating band of default in % 2 Loans commitments liabilities derivatives for sale Total
iAAA–iAA > 0.00 ≤ 0.04 37,450 20,567 4,963 14,844 59,157 136,982
iA > 0.04 ≤ 0.11 31,446 42,466 13,256 7,983 4,515 99,666
iBBB > 0.11 ≤ 0.5 31,706 41,190 15,230 6,848 1,911 96,885
iBB > 0.5 ≤ 2.27 23,865 35,173 6,811 4,139 2,621 72,609
iB > 2.27 ≤ 10.22 8,698 20,309 2,411 1,516 57 32,990
iCCC and below > 10.22 ≤ 100 4,532 1,670 759 514 4 7,479
Total 137,696 161,375 43,429 35,844 68,266 446,610
1 Net of eligible collateral, guarantees and hedges based on IFRS requirements.
Annual Report 2016
The corporate credit exposure net of collateral amounted to € 397.6 billion as of December 31, 2016 resulting in a risk
mitigation of 27 % or € 144.3 billion compared to the corporate gross exposure. This includes a more significant reduc-
tion of 47 % for our loans exposure which includes a reduction by 60 % for the lower-rated sub-investment-grade rated
loans and 39 % for the higher-rated investment-grade rated loans. The risk mitigation for the total exposure in the
weakest rating band was 53 %, which was significantly higher than 15 % in the strongest rating band.
The risk mitigation of € 144.3 billion is split into 29 % guarantees and hedges and 71 % other collateral.
CPSG Risk Mitigation for the Corporate Credit Exposure

Our Credit Portfolio Strategies Group (“CPSG”) helps mitigate the risk of our corporate credit exposures. The notional
amount of CPSG’s risk reduction activities decreased from € 45.0 billion as of December 31, 2015, to € 43.3 billion as
of December 31, 2016
As of year-end 2016, CPSG mitigated the credit risk of € 42.2 billion of loans and lending-related commitments as of
December 31, 2016, through synthetic collateralized loan obligations supported predominantly by financial guarantees.
This position totaled € 41.4 billion as of December 31, 2015.
CPSG also held credit derivatives with an underlying notional amount of € 1.1 billion. The position totaled € 3.6 billion
as of December 31, 2015. The credit derivatives used for our portfolio management activities are accounted for at fair
value.
CPSG has elected to use the fair value option under IAS 39 to report loans and commitments at fair value, provided the
criteria for this option are met. The notional amount of CPSG loans and commitments reported at fair value decreased
during the year to € 3.9 billion as of December 31, 2016, from € 8.2 billion as of December 31, 2015.
Consumer Credit Exposure

In our consumer credit exposure we monitor consumer loan delinquencies in terms of loans that are 90 days or more
past due and net credit costs, which are the annualized net provisions charged after recoveries.
Consumer credit exposure, consumer loan delinquencies and net credit costs
90 days or more past due Net credit costs
Total exposure in € m. 1 as a % of total exposure 1 as a % of total exposure 2
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 3 Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 3 Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 3
Consumer credit exposure Germany: 150,639 149,748 0.75 0.87 0.13 0.16
Consumer and small business financing 20,316 20,326 2.45 2.77 0.99 0.89
Mortgage lending 130,324 129,422 0.48 0.57 0.00 0.05
Consumer credit exposure outside Germany 38,162 39,158 4.22 4.89 0.68 0.54
Consumer and small business financing 13,663 13,259 8.44 9.55 0.98 1.18
Mortgage lending 24,499 25,898 1.87 2.50 0.51 0.21
Total consumer credit exposure 188,801 188,906 1.45 1.70 0.24 0.24
1 Includes impaired loans amounting to € 3.1 billion as of December 31, 2016 and € 3.6 billion as of December 31, 2015.
2 Net credit costs for the twelve months period ended at the respective balance sheet date divided by the exposure at that balance sheet date.
3
Retrospective as of December 31, 2015, about € 454 million Postbank mortgage loans are no longer assigned to Germany but rather Mortgage lending outside
Germany. These mortgage loans were in the context of a securitization, which was cancelled in 2016, previously reported as mortgage loans Germany.
The volume of our consumer credit exposure decreased from year-end 2015 to December 31, 2016 by € 105 million,
or 0.1 %, driven by reductions in our loan books in Italy (€ -1.0 billion), in Spain (€ -147 million) and in Poland
(€ -105 million), which were partly compensated by increases in Germany (€ +890 million) and in India (€ +319 million).
The volume changes in Italy, Germany, Spain and Poland were influenced by selective non-performing loan portfolio
sales. Additionally the reduction in Poland was affected by FX effects.
Employees – 252
The 90 days or more past due ratio of our consumer credit exposure decreased from 1.70 % as of year-end 2015 to
1.45 % as of December 31, 2016. The total net credit costs as a percentage of our consumer credit exposure stayed
unchanged at 0.24 %. This ratio was positively affected by the further improved and stabilized environment in countries
in which we operate and by aforementioned non-performing loan portfolio sale in Italy and negatively affected by non-
performing loan portfolio sales in Spain (mainly NCOU unit).
1
Consumer mortgage lending exposure grouped by loan-to-value buckets
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
≤ 50 % 68 % 68 %
> 50 ≤ 70 % 16 % 16 %
> 70 ≤ 90 % 9% 9%
> 90 ≤ 100 % 3% 3%
> 100 ≤ 110 % 2% 2%
> 110 ≤ 130 % 1% 1%
> 130 % 1% 2%
1 When assigning the exposure to the corresponding LTV buckets, the exposure amounts are distributed according to their relative share of the underlying assessed
real estate value.
The LTV expresses the amount of exposure as a percentage of assessed value of real estate.
Our LTV ratios are calculated using the total exposure divided by the current assessed value of the respective proper-
ties. These values are updated on a regular basis. The exposure of transactions that are additionally backed by liquid
collaterals is reduced by the respective collateral values, whereas any prior charges increase the corresponding total
exposure. The LTV calculation includes exposure which is secured by real estate collaterals. Any mortgage lending
exposure that is collateralized exclusively by any other type of collateral is not included in the LTV calculation.
The creditor’s creditworthiness, the LTV and the quality of collateral is an integral part of our risk management when
originating loans and when monitoring and steering our credit risks. In general, we are willing to accept higher LTV’s,
the better the creditor’s creditworthiness is. Nevertheless, restrictions of LTV apply for countries with negative eco-
nomic outlook or expected declines of real estate values.
As of December 31, 2016, 68 % of our exposure related to the mortgage lending portfolio had a LTV ratio below or
equal to 50 %, unchanged to the previous year.
Annual Report 2016
Credit Exposure from Derivatives

All exchange traded derivatives are cleared through central counterparties (“CCPs”), the rules and regulations of which
provide for daily margining of all current and future credit risk positions emerging out of such transactions. To the extent
possible, we also use CCP services for OTC derivative transactions (“OTC clearing”); we thereby benefit from the
credit risk mitigation achieved through the CCP’s settlement system.
The Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act (“DFA”) provides for an extensive framework for the
regulation of OTC derivatives, including mandatory clearing, exchange trading and transaction reporting of certain OTC
derivatives, as well as rules regarding the registration of, and capital, margin and business conduct standards for, swap
dealers, security-based swap dealers, major swap participants and major security-based swap participants. The DFA
and related Commodity Futures Trading Commission (“CFTC”) rules introduced in 2013 mandatory OTC clearing in the
United States for certain standardized OTC derivative transactions, including certain interest rate swaps and index
credit default swaps. The European Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 on OTC Derivatives, Central Counterparties and
Trade Repositories (“EMIR”) introduced a number of risk mitigation techniques for non-centrally cleared OTC deriva-
tives in 2013 and the reporting of OTC and exchange traded derivatives in 2014. Mandatory clearing for certain stan-
dardized OTC derivatives transactions in the EU began in June 2016, and margin requirements for uncleared OTC
derivative transactions in the EU started in February 2017, beginning with the initial margin requirement, which followed
a phased implementation schedule, and followed by the variation margin requirement, which started March 2017.
The CFTC adopted final rules in 2016 that require additional interest rate swaps to be cleared, with a phased imple-
mentation schedule ending in October 2018. In December 2016, also pursuant to the DFA, the CFTC re-proposed
regulations to impose position limits on certain commodities and economically equivalent swaps, futures and options.
This proposal has not yet been finalized. The Securities and Exchange Commission (“SEC”) has also finalized rules
regarding registration, business conduct standards and trade acknowledgement and verification requirements for secu-
rity-based swap dealers and major security-based swap participants, although these rules will not come into effect until
the SEC completes further security-based swap rulemakings. Finally, U.S. prudential regulators (the OCC, Federal
Reserve, FDIC, Farm Credit Administration and FHFA) and the CFTC have adopted final rules establishing margin
requirements for non-cleared swaps and security-based swaps. The final margin rules follow a phased implementation
schedule, with certain initial margin and variation margin requirements in effect as of September 2016, additional varia-
tion margin requirements in effect as of March 1, 2017, and additional initial margin requirements phased in on an
annual basis from September 2017 through September 2020, with the relevant compliance dates depending in each
case on the transactional volume of the parties and their affiliates.
Employees – 252
The following table shows a breakdown of notional amounts and gross market value of derivative transactions along
with a breakdown of notional amounts of OTC derivative assets and liabilities on the basis of clearing channel.
Notional amounts of derivatives on basis of clearing channel and type of derivative

Dec 31, 2016
Notional amount maturity distribution
Positive Negative Net
> 1 and market market market
in € m. Within 1 year ≤ 5 years After 5 years Total value value value
Interest rate related:
OTC 13,214,990 8,828,544 6,102,510 28,146,044 309,405 284,954 24,451
Bilateral (Amt) 2,777,349 3,625,915 2,645,075 9,048,340 272,059 248,396 23,664
CCP (Amt) 10,437,641 5,202,629 3,457,434 19,097,704 37,346 36,558 787
Exchange-traded 5,013,591 1,387,444 1,174 6,402,209 326 394 (68)
Total Interest rate related 18,228,581 10,215,988 6,103,684 34,548,253 309,731 285,348 24,382
Currency related:
OTC 3,994,113 1,053,558 537,044 5,584,715 129,731 126,480 3,251
Bilateral (Amt) 3,938,295 1,053,434 537,044 5,528,773 129,288 126,049 3,239
CCP (Amt) 55,818 124 0 55,942 443 431 12
Exchange-traded 29,431 398 35 29,864 6 54 (48)
Total Currency related 4,023,544 1,053,956 537,078 5,614,579 129,738 126,534 3,203
Equity/index related:
OTC 366,170 168,529 25,313 560,012 20,358 23,692 (3,334)
Bilateral (Amt) 366,170 168,529 25,313 560,012 20,358 23,692 (3,334)
CCP (Amt) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Exchange-traded 472,888 74,045 9,006 555,939 6,172 8,575 (2,402)
Total Equity/index related 839,058 242,574 34,319 1,115,951 26,531 32,266 (5,736)
Credit derivatives related
OTC 297,563 1,076,954 142,572 1,517,089 21,297 22,399 (1,102)
Bilateral (Amt) 157,950 298,313 58,852 515,115 7,426 8,238 (811)
CCP (Amt) 139,613 778,640 83,720 1,001,974 13,870 14,161 (291)
Exchange-traded 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total Credit derivatives related 297,563 1,076,954 142,572 1,517,089 21,297 22,399 (1,102)
Commodity related:
OTC 2,660 1,657 9,222 13,539 479 653 (175)
Bilateral (Amt) 2,660 1,657 9,222 13,539 479 653 (175)
CCP (Amt) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Exchange-traded 53,757 8,766 0 62,523 440 503 (63)
Total Commodity related 56,417 10,423 9,222 76,062 918 1,156 (238)
Other:
OTC 13,994 6,856 98 20,948 443 719 (276)
Bilateral (Amt) 13,963 6,856 98 20,917 433 698 (265)
CCP (Amt) 31 0 0 31 10 21 (11)
Exchange-traded 4,929 0 0 4,929 10 29 (18)
Total Other 18,923 6,856 98 25,877 453 747 (295)
Total OTC business 17,889,490 11,136,098 6,816,759 35,842,347 481,712 458,897 22,816
Total bilateral business 7,256,387 5,154,704 3,275,604 15,686,696 430,043 407,725 22,318
Total CCP business 10,633,102 5,981,394 3,541,155 20,155,651 51,669 51,172 497
Total exchange-traded business 5,574,597 1,470,653 10,214 7,055,464 6,954 9,555 (2,600)
Total 23,464,086 12,606,751 6,826,973 42,897,811 488,667 468,451 20,215
Positive market values after netting
and cash collateral received 0 0 0 0 44,784 0 0
Annual Report 2016
Dec 31, 2015

Notional amount maturity distribution
Positive Negative Net
> 1 and market market market
in € m. Within 1 year ≤ 5 years After 5 years Total value value value
Interest rate related:
OTC 10,955,593 9,682,810 6,375,377 27,013,781 345,998 325,179 20,819
Bilateral (Amt) 3,906,875 4,952,043 3,205,837 12,064,755 316,736 298,220 18,516
CCP (Amt) 7,048,718 4,730,767 3,169,540 14,949,025 29,261 26,959 2,302
Exchange-traded 4,452,134 1,400,495 3,742 5,856,371 272 237 35
Total Interest rate related 15,407,727 11,083,305 6,379,119 32,870,152 346,270 325,416 20,854
Currency related:
OTC 4,672,846 1,134,801 531,085 6,338,731 116,007 115,379 628
Bilateral (Amt) 4,644,414 1,134,686 531,085 6,310,184 115,900 115,270 630
CCP (Amt) 28,432 115 0 28,547 107 109 (2)
Exchange-traded 33,064 15 0 33,079 109 174 (65)
Total Currency related 4,705,910 1,134,815 531,085 6,371,810 116,116 115,553 563
Equity/index related:
OTC 394,193 197,092 23,521 614,806 25,063 28,818 (3,756)
Bilateral (Amt) 394,193 197,092 23,521 614,806 25,063 28,818 (3,756)
CCP (Amt) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Exchange-traded 501,706 66,571 8,993 577,270 5,533 6,164 (631)
Total Equity/index related 895,899 263,663 32,514 1,192,076 30,596 34,983 (4,387)
Credit derivatives related
OTC 270,524 949,312 129,622 1,349,458 23,548 20,992 2,556
Bilateral (Amt) 176,492 445,572 72,423 694,486 14,784 12,386 2,399
CCP (Amt) 94,032 503,741 57,199 654,972 8,763 8,606 157
Exchange-traded 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total Credit derivatives related 270,524 949,312 129,622 1,349,458 23,548 20,992 2,556
Commodity related:
OTC 5,998 1,260 9,516 16,775 776 891 (115)
Bilateral (Amt) 5,998 1,260 9,516 16,775 776 891 (115)
CCP (Amt) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Exchange-traded 78,204 27,066 10 105,279 497 604 (107)
Total Commodity related 84,202 28,326 9,526 122,054 1,273 1,496 (223)
Other:
OTC 20,621 5,378 43 26,043 906 1,953 (1,048)
Bilateral (Amt) 20,618 5,378 43 26,039 902 1,953 (1,051)
CCP (Amt) 3 0 0 3 3 0 3
Exchange-traded 8,430 11 0 8,441 22 49 (27)
Total Other 29,051 5,389 43 34,484 928 2,002 (1,074)
Total OTC business 16,319,775 11,970,654 7,069,164 35,359,593 512,297 493,213 19,084
Total bilateral business 9,148,589 6,736,032 3,842,425 19,727,045 474,162 457,538 16,623
Total CCP business 7,171,186 5,234,622 3,226,739 15,632,548 38,135 35,674 2,461
Total exchange-traded business 5,073,538 1,494,157 12,746 6,580,441 6,433 7,229 (795)
Total 21,393,313 13,464,811 7,081,910 41,940,034 518,730 500,441 18,289
Positive market values after netting
and cash collateral received 0 0 0 0 53,202 0 0
Employees – 252
Equity Exposure
The table below presents the carrying values of our equity investments according to IFRS definition split by trading and
nontrading for the respective reporting dates. We manage our respective positions within our market risk and other
appropriate risk frameworks.
Composition of our Equity Exposure

in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Trading Equities 75,633 76,044
Nontrading Equities 1 2,979 3,228
Total Equity Exposure 78,613 79,273
1 Includes equity investment funds amounting to € 288 million as of December 31, 2016 and € 642 million as of December 31, 2015.
As of December 31, 2016, our Trading Equities exposure was mainly composed of € 74.4 billion from Global Markets
activities and € 1.2 billion from Deutsche Asset Management business. Overall trading equities decreased by
€ 411 million year on year driven by decreased exposure in Deutsche Asset Management which was partly offset by
increases in Global Markets.
Asset Quality
This section describes the asset quality of our loans. All loans where known information about possible credit problems
of borrowers causes our management to have serious doubts as to the collectability of the borrower’s contractual obli-
gations are included in this section.
Overview of performing, renegotiated, past due and impaired loans by customer groups
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Corporate Consumer Corporate Consumer
in € m. loans loans Total loans loans Total
Loans neither past due, nor renegotiated
or impaired 219,106 182,760 401,865 237,758 182,306 420,064
Past due loans, neither renegotiated nor
impaired 882 2,445 3,327 1,143 2,544 3,687
Loans renegotiated, but not impaired 357 459 816 438 437 875
Impaired loans 4,310 3,137 7,447 4,532 3,619 8,151
Total 224,655 188,801 413,455 243,871 188,906 432,777
Past Due Loans

Loans are considered to be past due if contractually agreed payments of principal and/or interest remain unpaid by the
borrower, except if those loans are acquired through consolidation. The latter are considered to be past due if pay-
ments of principal and/or interest, which were expected at a certain payment date at the time of the initial consolidation
of the loans, are unpaid by the borrower.
Non-impaired past due loans at amortized cost by past due status

in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Loans less than 30 days past due 2,116 2,387
Loans 30 or more but less than 60 days past due 494 547
Loans 60 or more but less than 90 days past due 268 281
Loans 90 days or more past due 484 540
Total 3,363 3,755
Annual Report 2016
Non-impaired past due loans at amortized cost by industry

in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 1
Financial intermediation 95 203
Fund management activities 28 16
Manufacturing 278 125
Wholesale and retail trade 172 131
Households 2,076 2,495
Commercial real estate activities 190 192
Public sector 12 3
Other 512 592
Total 3,363 3,755
Non-impaired past due loans at amortized cost by region

in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Germany 1,299 1,430
Western Europe (excluding Germany) 1,531 1,417
Eastern Europe 155 139
North America 233 641
Central and South America 18 8
Asia/Pacific 113 106
Africa 14 15
Other 0 0
Total 3,363 3,755
Our non-impaired past due loans decreased by € 392 million to € 3.4 billion as of December 31, 2016 mainly driven by
a small number of counterparties in PW&CC.
Aggregated value of collateral – with the fair values of collateral capped at loan outstanding – held against our non-
impaired past due loans
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Financial and other collateral 1,775 2,254
Guarantees received 148 133
Total 1,923 2,387
Our aggregated value of collateral held against our non-impaired past due loans as of December 31, 2016 decreased
in line with the reduction of non-impaired past due loans compared to prior year.
Forborne Loans
For economic or legal reasons we might enter into a forbearance agreement with a borrower who faces or will face
financial difficulties in order to ease the contractual obligation for a limited period of time. A case by case approach is
applied for our corporate clients considering each transaction and client specific facts and circumstances. For consum-
er loans we offer forbearances for a limited period of time, in which the total or partial outstanding or future installments
are deferred to a later point of time. However, the amount not paid including accrued interest during this period must be
re-compensated at a later point of time. Repayment options include distribution over residual tenor, a one-off payment
or a tenor extension. Forbearances are restricted and depending on the economic situation of the client, our risk man-
agement strategies and the local legislation. In case a forbearance agreement is entered into, an impairment meas-
urement is conducted as described below, an impairment charge is taken if necessary and the loan is subsequently
recorded as impaired.
In our management and reporting of forborne loans, we are following the EBA definition for forbearances and non-
performing loans (Implementing Technical Standards (ITS) on Supervisory reporting on forbearance and non-
performing exposures under article 99(4) of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013). Once the conditions mentioned in the ITS
are met, we report the loan as being forborne; we remove the loan from our forbearance reporting, once the discontin-
uance criteria in the ITS are met (i.e., the contract is considered as performing, a minimum 2 year probation period has
passed, regular payments of more than an insignificant aggregate amount of principal or interest have been made
Employees – 252
during at least half of the probation period, and none of the exposures to the debtor is more than 30 days past-due at
the end of the probation period).
Forborne Loans
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Total Total
Non- forborne Non- forborne
Performing performing loans Performing performing loans
in € m. Nonimpaired Nonimpaired Impaired Nonimpaired Nonimpaired Impaired
German 907 374 983 2,264 1,067 441 1,096 2,605
Non-German 799 709 1,697 3,204 619 716 1,801 3,136
Total 1,706 1,083 2,679 5,468 1,686 1,157 2,897 5,741
The reduction of Total forborne loans in 2016 of € 273 million was driven by performing as well as non-performing
forborne loans to German clients, mainly driven by NCOU reflecting de-risking activities and PW&CC resulting from the
ongoing benign environment in the German credit market.
Impaired Loans
Credit Risk Management regularly assesses whether there is objective evidence that a loan or group of loans
is impaired. A loan or group of loans is impaired and impairment losses are incurred if:
‒ there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of a loss event that occurred after the initial recognition of the
asset and up to the balance sheet date (“a loss event”). When making our assessment we consider information on
such events that is reasonably available up to the date the financial statements are authorized for issuance in line
with the requirements of IAS 10;
‒ the loss event had an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or the group
of financial assets, and
‒ a reliable estimate of the loss amount can be made.
Credit Risk Management’s loss assessments are subject to regular review in collaboration with Group Finance. The
results of this review are reported to and approved by Group Finance and Risk Senior Management.
For further details with regard to impaired loans please refer to Note 1 “Significant Accounting Policies and Critical
Accounting Estimates”.
Impairment Loss and Allowance for Loan Losses

If there is evidence of impairment the impairment loss is generally calculated on the basis of discounted expected cash
flows using the original effective interest rate of the loan. If the terms of a loan are renegotiated or otherwise modified
because of financial difficulties of the borrower without qualifying for de-recognition of the loan, the impairment loss is
measured using the original effective interest rate before modification of terms. We reduce the carrying amount of the
impaired loan by the use of an allowance account and recognize the amount of the loss in the consolidated statement
of income as a component of the provision for credit losses. We record increases to our allowance for loan losses as
an increase of the provision for loan losses in our income statement. Charge-offs reduce our allowance while recover-
ies, if any, are credited to the allowance account. If we determine that we no longer require allowances which we have
previously established, we decrease our allowance and record the amount as a reduction of the provision for loan
losses in our income statement. When it is considered that there is no realistic prospect of recovery and all collateral
has been realized or transferred to us, the loan and any associated allowance for loan losses is charged off (i.e., the
loan and the related allowance for loan losses are removed from the balance sheet).
While we assess the impairment for our corporate credit exposures individually, we assess the impairment of our
smaller-balance standardized homogeneous loans collectively.
Annual Report 2016
Our collectively assessed allowance for non-impaired loans reflects allowances to cover for incurred losses that have
neither been individually identified nor provided for as part of the impairment assessment of smaller-balance homoge-
neous loans.
For further details regarding our accounting policies regarding impairment loss and allowance for credit losses please
refer to Note 1 “Significant Accounting Policies and Critical Accounting Estimates”.
Impaired loans, allowance for loan losses and coverage ratios by business division
2016 increase (decrease)
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 from 2015
Impaired loan Impaired loan Impaired loan
Impaired Loan loss coverage Impaired Loan loss coverage Impaired coverage
in € m. loans allowance ratio in % loans allowance ratio in % loans ratio in ppt
1
Global Markets 181 187 103 5 83 1,814 177 (1,711)
Corporate & Investment
Banking 2,826 1,706 60 2,154 1,375 64 672 (3)
Private, Wealth &
Commercial Clients 1,938 1,210 62 2,157 1,332 62 (219) 1
Deutsche Asset
Management 2 0 1 N/M 0 1 N/M 0 N/M
Postbank 1,708 1,007 59 1,846 1,126 61 (138) (2)
Non-Core Operations Unit 794 432 54 1,989 1,109 56 (1,195) (1)
thereof: assets reclassi-
fied to loans and receiva-
bles according to IAS 39 92 69 75 667 389 58 (575) 17
Consolidation &
Adjustments and Other 2 0 4 N/M 0 2 N/M 0 N/M
Total 7,447 4,546 61 8,151 5,028 62 (703) (1)
N/M – Not meaningful.
1 Impaired Loans in Global Markets are more than fully covered by loan loss allowance due to the latter including collectively assessed allowance for non-impaired
loans.
2 Allowance in Consolidation & Adjustments and Other and Deutsche Asset Management fully consists of collectively assessed allowance for non-impaired loans.
Impaired loans, allowance for loan losses and coverage ratios by industry
Dec 31, 2016
Impaired Loans Loan loss allowance
Collectively Collectively
assessed assessed
Individually allowance for allowance for Impaired loan
Individually Collectively assessed impaired non-impaired coverage
in € m. assessed assessed Total allowance loans loans Total ratio in %
Financial intermediation 122 11 133 27 3 47 77 58
Fund management
activities 14 7 21 1 0 4 5 26
Manufacturing 524 229 754 476 149 82 707 94
Wholesale and retail
trade 472 234 707 223 161 29 413 58
Households 193 2,467 2,661 220 1,466 67 1,754 66
Commercial real estate
activities 385 37 422 168 25 39 233 55
Public sector 19 0 19 4 0 3 7 35
Other 1 2,397 334 2,731 953 168 230 1,351 49
Total 4,126 3,321 7,447 2,071 1,972 503 4,546 61
1 Thereof “Transportation, storage and communication’: Total Impaired Loans € 1.1 billion (40 %), Total Loan loss allowance € 650 million (48 %). The rest is split
across various industries (of which no single one contributes 25 % or more to the total of the category ‘Other’).
Employees – 252
Dec 31, 2015 1

assessed assessed
Financial intermediation 159 10 169 38 5 55 98 58
Fund management
activities 23 10 33 1 0 7 8 25
Manufacturing 518 247 765 470 149 70 688 90
Wholesale and retail
trade 280 257 538 182 154 45 381 71
Households 332 2,931 3,263 324 1,805 74 2,202 67
Commercial real estate
activities 860 52 912 503 36 36 576 63
Public sector 16 0 16 2 0 2 5 32
Other 2 2,047 408 2,456 733 186 153 1,071 44
Total 4,236 3,916 8,151 2,252 2,335 442 5,028 62
2 Thereof ‘Transportation, storage and communication’: Total Impaired Loans € 865 million (34 %), Total Loan loss allowance € 375 million (35 %). The rest is split
across various industries (of which no single one contributes 25 % or more to the totals of the category ‘Other’).
Impaired loans, allowance for loan losses and coverage ratios by region
Dec 31, 2016
assessed assessed
Germany 1,154 1,486 2,639 563 804 122 1,489 56
Western Europe
(excluding Germany) 2,021 1,688 3,709 1,008 1,057 130 2,195 59
Eastern Europe 46 132 179 39 106 10 154 86
North America 495 1 496 148 0 128 277 56
Central and South
America 4 0 5 3 0 14 16 363 1
Asia/Pacific 341 14 355 286 5 76 367 103 1
Africa 63 1 64 24 0 8 32 50
Other 2 0 2 0 0 17 17 908 1
Total 4,126 3,321 7,447 2,071 1,972 503 4,546 61
1 Impaired Loans in Central & South America, Asia Pacific and Other are more than fully covered by loan loss allowance due to the latter including collectively
assessed allowance for non-impaired loans.
Dec 31, 2015

assessed assessed
Germany 1,362 1,642 3,004 647 930 105 1,682 56
Western Europe
(excluding Germany) 2,280 2,057 4,337 1,294 1,237 132 2,662 61
Eastern Europe 76 179 255 38 165 10 213 83
North America 340 2 342 150 0 107 257 75
Central and South
America 0 6 6 0 0 12 12 187 1
Asia/Pacific 155 23 178 100 2 60 162 91
Africa 21 5 26 23 0 5 28 107 1
Other 2 0 2 0 0 10 10 553 1
Total 4,236 3,915 8,151 2,252 2,335 442 5,028 62
1 Impaired Loans in Central & South America, Africa and Other are more than fully covered by loan loss allowance due to the latter including collectively assessed
allowance for non-impaired loans.
Annual Report 2016
Development of Impaired Loans

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Individually Collectively Individually Collectively
in € m. assessed assessed Total assessed assessed Total
Balance, beginning of year 4,236 3,915 8,151 4,990 4,359 9,348
Classified as impaired during the year 2,177 1,291 3,469 898 1,176 2,073
Transferred to not impaired during the year 1 (1,080) (723) (1,803) (1,010) (859) (1,869)
Charge-offs (979) (987) (1,966) (537) (717) (1,254)
Disposals of impaired loans (266) (161) (427) (239) (53) (292)
Exchange rate and other movements 38 (15) 23 135 10 145
Balance, end of year 4,126 3,321 7,447 4,236 3,915 8,151
1 Includes repayments.
Our impaired loans decreased in 2016 by € 704 million or 9 % to € 7.4 billion resulting from reductions in our collec-
tively assessed portfolio caused by NCOU, PW&CC and Postbank. There were further reductions in our individually
assessed portfolio, where reductions in NCOU due to asset disposals more than offset new impairments in CIB and
GM. The new impairments caused among other things by the continued market weakness of the shipping sector along
and lower commodity prices in the metals and mining sector.
The impaired loan coverage ratio (defined as total on-balance sheet allowances for all loans individually impaired or
collectively assessed divided by IFRS impaired loans (excluding collateral) decreased from 62 % as of year-end 2015
to 61 % as of December 31, 2016.
Our impaired loans included € 92 million of loans reclassified to loans and receivables in accordance with IAS 39, down
€ 575 million or 86 % from the level at prior year end. This decline was mainly driven by charge-offs.
Provision for loan losses and recoveries by Industry

2016 2015
Provision for loan losses before recoveries
For For Provision for
For collectively collectively loan losses
individually assessed assessed before
assessed impaired non-impaired recoveries
in € m. loans loans loans Total Recoveries (total) Recoveries
Financial intermediation 5 1 (9) (3) 4 (5) 1
Fund management activities 0 1 (3) (2) 0 2 0
Manufacturing 177 20 12 209 14 61 16
Wholesale and retail trade 43 28 (14) 58 4 78 4
Households 20 521 (10) 531 99 513 101
Commercial real estate activities 32 39 5 76 36 33 18
Public sector (0) 0 1 0 0 (17) 0
Other 1 552 58 55 665 31 378 21
Total 829 668 37 1,534 187 1,043 161
1 The largest driver of Total Provision for loan losses before recoveries was the sector ‘Transportation, storage and communication’ with € 422 million (63 %) in 2016
and € 154 million (41 %) in 2015. The rest is split across various industries (of which no single one contributes 25 % or more of the total of the category ‘Other’).
Our existing commitments to lend additional funds to debtors with impaired loans amounted to € 117 million as of De-
cember 31, 2016 and € 54 million as of December 31, 2015.
Collateral held against impaired loans, with fair values capped at transactional outstanding
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Financial and other collateral 2,016 2,722
Total collateral held for impaired loans 2,359 2,945
Our total collateral held for impaired loans as of December 31, 2016 decreased by € 586 million or 20 % compared to
previous year, while coverage ratio including collateral (defined as total on-balance sheet allowances for all loans indi-
vidually impaired or collectively assessed plus collateral held against impaired loans, with fair values capped at transac-
tional outstanding, divided by IFRS impaired loans) declined to 93 % as of December 31, 2016 compared to 98 % as of
December 31, 2015.
Employees – 252
Financial assets available for sale

The impairment concept is also applicable for available for sale debt instruments, which are otherwise carried at fair
value with changes in fair value reported in other comprehensive income. If an available for sale debt instrument is
considered impaired, the cumulative impairment loss reflects the difference between the amortized cost and the current
fair value of the instrument. For a detailed discussion of our accounting procedures please refer to Note 1 “Significant
Accounting policies and Critical Accounting Estimates”.
Non-impaired past due and impaired financial assets available for sale, accumulated impairments, coverage ratio and
collateral held against impaired financial assets available for sale
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Financial assets non-impaired past due available for sale 1,661 1,610
thereof:
Less than 30 days past due 178 47
30 or more but less than 60 days past due 24 0
60 or more but less than 90 days past due 23 0
90 days or more past due 1,436 1,563
Impaired financial assets available for sale 229 229
Accumulated impairment for financial assets available for sale 131 109
Impaired financial assets available for sale coverage ratio in % 57 47
Collateral held against impaired financial assets available for sale 20 19
thereof:
Financial and other collateral 20 19
Collateral Obtained
We obtain collateral on the balance sheet by taking possession of collateral held as security or by calling upon other
credit enhancements. Collateral obtained is made available for sale in an orderly fashion or through public auctions,
with the proceeds used to repay or reduce outstanding indebtedness. Generally we do not occupy obtained properties
for our business use. The commercial and residential real estate collateral obtained in 2016 refers predominantly to our
exposures in Spain.
Collateral obtained during the reporting periods

in € m. 2016 2015
Commercial real estate 9 5
Residential real estate 55 43
Other 0 0
Total collateral obtained during the reporting period 64 48
The collateral obtained, as shown in the table above, excludes collateral recorded as a result of consolidating securiti-
zation trusts under IFRS 10. In 2016 as well as in 2015 the group did not obtain any collateral related to these trusts.
Annual Report 2016
Allowance for Credit Losses

Development of allowance for credit losses
2016
Allowance for Loan Losses Allowance for Off-Balance Sheet Positions
in € m. assessed assessed Subtotal assessed assessed Subtotal Total
Balance, beginning of year 2,252 2,776 5,028 144 168 312 5,340
Provision for credit losses 743 604 1,347 24 12 36 1,383
thereof: (Gains)/Losses from
disposal of impaired loans 3 (16) (13) 0 0 0 (13)
Net charge-offs: (894) (870) (1,764) 0 0 0 (1,764)
Charge-offs (979) (972) (1,951) 0 0 0 (1,951)
Recoveries 85 101 187 0 0 0 187
Other changes (30) (35) (65) (5) 3 (2) (67)
Balance, end of year 2,071 2,475 4,546 162 183 346 4,892
Changes compared to prior year

Provision for credit losses
Absolute 409 56 465 (34) (4) (39) 427
Relative 123 % 10 % 53 % (59) % (27) % (52) % 45 %
Net charge-offs
Absolute (412) (258) (670) 0 0 0 (670)
Relative 85 % 42 % 61 % 0% 0% 0% 61 %
Balance, end of year
Absolute (181) (301) (482) 18 15 34 (448)
Relative (8) % (11) % (10) % 13 % 9% 11 % (8) %
Allowance for credit losses as at December 31, 2016 amounted to € 4.9 billion compared to € 5.3 billion as at Decem-
ber 31, 2015. The reduction was driven by charge-offs, partly compensated by additional provision for credit losses.
As of December 31, 2016, provision for credit losses increased by € 427 million compared to year-end 2015, driven by
an increase in provision for loan losses of € 465 million partly offset by a reduction in provisions for off-balance sheet
positions of € 39 million. The increase in our individually assessed portfolio mainly resulted from CIB and Global Mar-
kets reflecting the continued market weakness of the shipping sector as well as lower commodity prices in the metals
and mining and oil and gas sectors. The increase in provisions for our collectively assessed loan portfolio was mainly
driven by NCOU partly relating to higher charges for IAS 39 reclassified assets and partly offset by PW&CC and Post-
bank, among other factors reflecting the good quality of the loan book and the benign economic environment. The
reduction in provisions for off-balance sheet positions was driven by CIB and reflects releases caused by crystallization
into cash of a few guarantee exposures leading to higher provision for loan losses.
The increase in net charge-offs of € 670 million compared to 2015 was mainly driven by NCOU caused by IAS 39
reclassified assets along with disposals.
Our allowance for loan losses for IAS 39 reclassified assets, which were reported in NCOU, amounted to € 69 million
as of December 31, 2016, representing 2 % of our total allowance for loan losses, down 82 % from the level at the end
of 2015 which amounted to € 389 million (8 % of total allowance for loan losses). This reduction was driven by charge
offs of € 355 million along with reduction driven by foreign exchange as most IAS 39 reclassified assets are denomi-
nated in non-Euro currencies and partly offset by additional provisions of € 66 million.
Compared to 2015, provision for loan losses for IAS 39 reclassified assets increased by € 110 million mainly related to
our European mortgage portfolios. Net charge offs increased by € 242 million mainly driven by the European mortgage
portfolio and one large single booking.
Employees – 252
2015
Allowance for Loan Losses Allowance for Off-Balance Sheet Positions
in € m. assessed assessed Subtotal assessed assessed Subtotal Total
Balance, beginning of year 2,364 2,849 5,212 85 141 226 5,439
Provision for credit losses 334 548 882 58 16 74 956
thereof: (Gains)/Losses from
disposal of impaired loans (64) (51) (116) 0 0 0 (116)
Net charge-offs: (482) (612) (1,094) 0 0 0 (1,094)
Charge-offs (538) (717) (1,255) 0 0 0 (1,255)
Recoveries 56 105 161 0 0 0 161
Other changes 36 (8) 28 1 10 11 39
Balance, end of year 2,252 2,776 5,028 144 168 312 5,340
Changes compared to prior year

Provision for credit losses
Absolute (164) (83) (247) 71 (1) 70 (178)
Relative (33) % (13) % (22) % (538) % (8) % N/M1 (16) %
Net charge-offs
Absolute 515 (100) 415 0 0 0 415
Relative (52) % 19 % (28) % 0% 0% 0% (28) %
Balance, end of year
Absolute (112) (72) (184) 59 27 86 (99)
Relative (5) % (3) % (4) % 69 % 19 % 38 % (2) %
Allowance for credit losses as at December 2015 amounted to € 5.3 billion compared to € 5.4 billion as at the end of
2014. The reduction is mainly driven by charge offs in part relating to disposals.
Provision for credit losses decreased by € 178 million compared to prior year, driven by a reduction in provision for loan
losses of € 247 million. The reduction in 2015 in provisions for loan losses in our individually assessed loan portfolio of
€ 164 million is driven by IAS 39 reclassified assets and other real estate exposures recorded in NCOU, partly offset by
higher provisioning in our Shipping and Leveraged Finance Portfolios in CIB. The reduction in our collectively assessed
loan portfolio of € 83 million mainly results from higher releases related to disposals along with an ongoing positive
credit environment in Germany and a stabilization of Southern European markets. The increase in provisions for off-
balance sheet exposures of € 70 million compared to 2014 is driven by CIB mainly reflecting one large item and Post-
bank.
The reduction in charge offs of € 415 million compared to 2014 is mainly driven by Postbank and results from high prior
year levels caused by a one-off effect due to the alignment of processes.
Our allowance for loan losses for IAS 39 reclassified assets, which are reported in NCOU, amounted to € 389 million at
the end of 2015, representing 8 % of our total allowance for loan losses, down 25 % from the level at the end of the
prior year which amounted to € 518 million (10 % of total allowance for loan losses). This reduction was driven by net
charge offs of € 113 million along with net releases of € 44 million and partly offset by increases related to foreign ex-
change as most IAS 39 reclassified assets are denominated in non-Euro currencies.
Compared to 2014, provision for loan losses for IAS 39 reclassified assets dropped by € 129 million and net charge-
offs increased by € 98 million in 2015. Both changes were partly related to disposals.
Derivatives – Credit Valuation Adjustment

We establish counterparty Credit Valuation Adjustment (“CVA”) for OTC derivative transactions to cover expected
credit losses. The adjustment amount is determined by assessing the potential credit exposure to a given counterparty
and taking into account any collateral held, the effect of any relevant netting arrangements, expected loss given default
and the credit risk, based on available market information, including CDS spreads.
Annual Report 2016
Treatment of Default Situations under Derivatives

Unlike standard loan assets, we generally have more options to manage the credit risk in our derivatives transactions
when movement in the current replacement costs or the behavior of our counterparty indicate that there is the risk that
upcoming payment obligations under the transactions might not be honored. In these situations, we are frequently able
under the relevant derivatives agreements to obtain additional collateral or to terminate and close-out the derivative
transactions at short notice.
The master agreements for OTC derivative transactions executed with our clients usually provide for a broad set of
standard or bespoke termination rights, which allow us to respond swiftly to a counterparty’s default or to other circum-
stances which indicate a high probability of failure. We have less comfort under the rules and regulations applied by
clearing CCPs, which rely primarily on the clearing members default fund contributions and guarantees and less on the
termination and close-out of contracts, which will be considered only at a later point in time after all other measures
failed. Considering the severe systemic disruptions to the financial system, that could be caused by a disorderly failure
of a CCP, the Financial Stability Board (“FSB”) recommended in October 2014 to subject CCPs to resolution regimes
that apply the same objectives and provisions that apply to global systematically important banks (G-SIBs).
Our contractual termination rights are supported by internal policies and procedures with defined roles and responsibili-
ties which ensure that potential counterparty defaults are identified and addressed in a timely fashion. These proce-
dures include necessary settlement and trading restrictions. When our decision to terminate derivative transactions
results in a residual net obligation owed by the counterparty, we restructure the obligation into a non-derivative claim
and manage it through our regular work-out process. As a consequence, for accounting purposes we typically do not
show any nonperforming derivatives.
Wrong-way risk occurs when exposure to a counterparty is adversely correlated with the credit quality of that counter-
party. In compliance with Article 291(2) and (4) CRR we, excluding Postbank, had established a monthly process to
monitor several layers of wrong-way risk (specific wrong-way risk, general explicit wrong-way risk at coun-
try/industry/region levels and general implicit wrong-way risk, whereby exposures arising from transactions subject to
wrong-way risk are automatically selected and presented for comment to the responsible credit officer). A wrong-way
risk report is then sent to Credit Risk senior management on a monthly basis. In addition, we, excluding Postbank,
utilized our established process for calibrating our own alpha factor (as defined in Article 284 (9) CRR) to estimate the
overall wrong-way risk in our derivatives and securities financing transaction portfolio. Postbank derivative counterparty
risk is immaterial to the Group and collateral held is typically in the form of cash.
Trading Market Risk Exposures

Value-at-Risk Metrics of Trading Units of Deutsche Bank Group (excluding
Postbank)
The tables and graph below present the value-at-risk metrics calculated with a 99 % confidence level and a one-day
holding period for our trading units. They exclude contributions from Postbank trading book which are calculated on a
stand-alone basis.
Value-at-Risk of our Trading Units by Risk Type

Diversification Interest rate Credit spread Equity price Foreign exchange Commodity price
Total effect risk risk risk risk 1 risk
in € m. 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015
Average 32.0 43.3 (35.0) (40.9) 19.7 20.3 26.6 30.9 9.3 16.6 10.7 15.0 0.7 1.3
Maximum 59.4 65.6 (57.6) (59.2) 29.5 30.2 32.5 40.3 52.4 28.3 16.7 25.0 3.3 4.0
Minimum 20.4 28.7 (25.6) (31.0) 14.8 16.2 22.3 24.0 4.4 9.2 3.6 6.0 0.2 0.5
Period-end 30.1 33.3 (36.9) (38.8) 19.9 18.3 24.3 26.2 10.0 11.7 12.6 15.1 0.2 0.9
1 Includes value-at-risk from gold and other precious metal positions.
Employees – 252
Development of value-at-risk by risk types in 2016

1/16 2/16 3/16 4/16 5/16 6/16 7/16 8/16 9/16 10/16 11/16 12/16
60
50
40
30
20
in € m.
VaR Interest rate risk

VaR Credit spread risk
VaR Equity risk
VaR Foreign exchange including precious metals
VaR Commodity risk
VaR Total
The average value-at-risk over 2016 was € 32.0 million, which is a decrease of € 11.2 million compared with the full
year 2015. The reduction in the average was driven by decreases across the credit spread, foreign exchange and
equity asset classes as a result of a decrease in directional exposure on average compared to the full year 2015. The
spike in value-at-risk in December 2016 was driven by activity on the trading books for a short period of time during the
facilitation of client transactions.
Regulatory Trading Market Risk Measures (excluding Postbank)

The table below presents the stressed value-at-risk metrics calculated with a 99 % confidence level and a one-day
holding period for our trading units. It excludes contributions from Postbank’s trading book which are calculated on a
stand-alone basis
Average, Maximum and Minimum Stressed Value-at-Risk by Risk Type

Diversification Interest rate Credit spread Equity price Foreign exchange Commodity price
Total effect risk risk risk risk 1 risk
in € m. 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015
Average 85.2 105.1 (78.2) (114.5) 51.9 60.7 74.9 106.7 20.6 22.8 14.8 26.7 1.3 2.5
Maximum 143.7 135.7 (150.0) (186.7) 82.5 84.2 99.3 154.5 144.5 68.7 30.4 59.8 3.9 7.6
Minimum 60.4 82.4 (53.4) (71.7) 37.4 45.1 59.0 82.6 2.4 0.1 3.4 5.7 0.4 0.7
Period-end 75.8 106.3 (91.3) (98.0) 51.9 45.5 63.0 90.9 29.6 44.1 22.1 22.6 0.5 1.2
1 Includes value-at-risk from gold and other precious metal positions.
The average stressed value-at-risk was € 85.2 million over 2016, a decrease of € 19.9 million compared with the full
year 2015. The reduction in the average was driven by decreases coming from across the credit spread, foreign ex-
change and equity asset classes as a result of a decrease in directional exposure on average compared to the full year
2015. Additionally interest rate stressed value-at-risk has decreased on average over 2016 due to changes in the
composition of the portfolio. Similar to value-at-risk there was a spike in December 2016 due to the facilitation of client
transactions.
Annual Report 2016
The following graph compares the development of the daily value-at-risk with the daily stressed value-at-risk and their
60 day averages, calculated with a 99 % confidence level and a one-day holding period for our trading units. Amounts
are shown in millions of euro and exclude contributions from Postbank’s trading book which are calculated on a stand-
alone basis.
Development of value-at-risk and stressed value-at-risk in 2016

1/16 2/16 3/16 4/16 5/16 6/16 7/16 8/16 9/16 10/16 11/16 12/16
140
120
100
80
60
40
20
in € m.
SVaR Total
SVaR Rolling 60d Average
VaR Total
VaR Rolling 60d Average
For regulatory reporting purposes, the incremental risk charge for the respective reporting dates represents the higher
of the spot value at the reporting dates, and their preceding 12-week average calculation.
Average, Maximum and Minimum Incremental Risk Charge of Trading Units (with a 99.9 % confidence level and one-year
1,2,3,
capital horizon)
Non-Core Global Credit Fixed Income & Emerging
Total Operations Unit Trading Core Rates Currencies APAC Markets - Debt Other
in € m. 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015 2016 2015
Average 840.2 975.0 52.0 17.5 393.0 539.3 200.4 106.0 188.6 160.0 116.8 235.0 (110.5) (82.0)
Maximum 944.4 1,020.8 57.3 85.0 405.8 693.0 229.6 179.0 243.0 351.0 128.0 300.0 (65.6) (52.0)
Minimum 693.0 843.8 44.5 (4.8) 368.0 435.0 173.7 50.0 119.6 113.0 111.6 144.0 (141.8) (128.0)
Period-end 693.0 890.0 51.8 (1.0) 368.0 489.0 173.7 86.0 119.6 123.0 121.8 259.0 (141.8) (65.0)
1
Amounts show the bands within which the values fluctuated during the 12-weeks preceding December 31, 2016 and December 31, 2015, respectively.
2
Business line breakdowns have been updated for 2016 reporting to better reflect the current business structure.
3
All liquidity horizons are set to 12 months.
The incremental risk charge as at the end of 2016 was € 693 million a decrease of € 197 million (22 %) compared with
year end 2015. The 12-week average of the incremental risk charge as at the end of 2016 was € 840 million and thus
€ 135 million (14 %) lower compared with the average for the 12-week period ended December 31, 2015. The de-
creased average incremental risk charge is driven by a decrease in credit exposures in global credit trading when
compared to the full year 2015.
For regulatory reporting purposes, the comprehensive risk measure for the respective reporting dates represents the
higher of the internal spot value at the reporting dates, their preceding 12-week average calculation, and the floor,
where the floor is equal to 8 % of the equivalent capital charge under the standardized approach securitization frame-
work.
Employees – 252
Average, Maximum and Minimum Comprehensive Risk Measure of Trading Units (with a 99.9 % confidence level and one-
1,2,3
year capital horizon)
in € m. 2016 2015
Average 31.3 188.4
Maximum 39.8 197.3
Minimum 21.9 180.3
Period-end 17.9 190.2
1 Regulatory Comprehensive Risk Measure calculated for the 12-week period ending December 31.
2 Period end is based on the internal model spot value.
3 All liquidity horizons are set to 12 months.
The comprehensive risk measure as at the end of 2016 was € 18 million and decreased by € 172 million (91 %) com-
pared with year end 2015. The 12-week average of our comprehensive risk measure as at the end of 2016 was
€ 31 million and thus € 157 million (83 %) lower compared with the average for the 12-week period ended Decem-
ber 31, 2015. The reduction was due to continued de-risking on the correlation trading portfolio.
Market Risk Standardized Approach

As of December 31, 2016, the securitization positions, for which the specific interest rate risk is calculated using the
market risk standardized approach, generated capital requirements of € 278.4 million corresponding to risk weighted-
assets of € 3.5 billion. As of December 31, 2015 these positions generated capital requirements of € 811 million corre-
sponding to risk weighted-assets of € 10.1 billion. The reduction is due to continued de-risking of securitization expo-
sures.
For nth-to-default credit default swaps the capital requirement increased to € 6.4 million corresponding to risk weighted-
assets of € 80 million compared with € 6 million and € 78 million as of December 31, 2015.
Additionally, the capital requirement for investment funds under the market risk standardized approach was € 39 million
corresponding to risk weighted-assets of € 487 million as of December 31, 2016, compared with € 70 million and
€ 873 million as of December 31, 2015.
The capital requirement for longevity risk under the market risk standardized approach was € 46 million for NCOU and
PIRM corresponding to risk weighted-assets of € 570 million as of December 31, 2016, compared with € 36 million and
€ 451 million as of December 31, 2015.
Value-at-Risk at Postbank
The value-at-risk of Postbank’s trading book calculated with a 99 % confidence level and a one-day holding period
amounted to zero as of December 31, 2016. Postbank’s current trading strategy does not allow any new trading activi-
ties with regard to the trading book. Therefore, Postbank’s trading book did not contain any positions as of Decem-
ber 31, 2016. Nevertheless, Postbank will remain classified as a trading book institution.
Results of Regulatory Backtesting of Trading Market Risk

In 2016 we observed one global outlier, where our loss on a buy-and-hold basis exceeded the value-at-risk, compared
with three outliers in 2015. The outlier in 2016 occurred in February and was driven by market-event related losses
across various businesses. This was as a consequence of heightened risk aversion in the markets following several
concerns to the global economic outlook. Based on the backtesting results, our analysis of the underlying reasons for
outliers and enhancements included in our value-at-risk methodology we continue to believe that our value-at-risk
model will remain an appropriate measure for our trading market risk under normal market conditions.
The following graph shows the trading units daily buy-and-hold income in comparison to the value-at-risk as of the
close of the previous business day for the trading days of the reporting period. The value-at-risk is presented in nega-
tive amounts to visually compare the estimated potential loss of our trading positions with the buy and hold income.
Annual Report 2016
Figures are shown in millions of euro. The chart shows that our trading units achieved a positive buy and hold income
for 54 % of the trading days in 2016 (versus 51 % in 2015), as well as displaying the global outlier experienced in 2016.
Comparison of trading units daily buy-and-hold income and value-at-risk in 2016

1/16 2/16 3/16 4/16 5/16 6/16 7/16 8/16 9/16 10/16 11/16 12/16
100
80
60
40
20
-20
-40
-60
-80
-100
in € m.
Buy-and-hold income of Trading Units

Value-at-Risk
Daily Income of our Trading Units

The following histogram shows the distribution of daily income of our trading units (excluding Postbank). Daily income
is defined as total income which consists of new trades, fees & commissions, buy & hold income, reserves, carry and
other income. It displays the number of trading days on which we reached each level of trading income shown on the
horizontal axis in millions of euro.
Distribution of daily income of our trading units in 2016

Days
30
20
10
0
in € m.
(40) to (35
(5) to 0
0 to 5
5 to 10
10 to 15
15 to 20
20 to 25
25 to 30
30 to 35
35 to 40
40 to 45
45 to 50
50 to 55
55 to 60
60 to 65
65 to 70
70 to 75
75 to 80
80 to 85
85 to 90
90 to 95
95 to 100
100 to 105
105 to 110
110 to 115
115 to 120
120 to 125
125 to 130
130 to 135
135 to 140
140 to 145
145 to 150
Over 150
Below (50)
(50) to (45)
(45) to (40)
(35) to (30)
(30) to (25)
(25) to (20)
(20) to (15)
(15) to (10)
(10) to (5)
Our trading units achieved a positive revenue for 87 % of the trading days in 2016 compared with 91 % in the full year
2015.
Employees – 252
Nontrading Market Risk Exposures

Carrying Value and Economic Capital Usage for Nontrading Market Risk
Portfolios
Carrying Value and Economic Capital Usage for Nontrading Portfolios.
Carrying value Economic capital usage
in € m. Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Strategic investments 1,064 829 562 332
Alternative assets 2,335 6,363 690 2,764
Principal investments 972 1,735 374 504
Other nonstrategic investment assets 1,363 4,627 316 2,260
Other nontrading market risks 1 N/M N/M 9,112 9,782
Interest rate risk N/M N/M 1,921 2,057
Credit spread risk N/M N/M 1,419 1,654
Equity compensation risk N/M N/M 582 405
Pension risk N/M N/M 1,007 828
Structural foreign exchange risk N/M N/M 2,485 3,183
Guaranteed funds risk N/M N/M 1,699 1,655
Total nontrading market risk portfolios 3,399 7,192 10,364 12,878
1 N/M – Indicates that the risk is mostly related to off-balance sheet and liabilities items.
The economic capital figures do take into account diversification benefits between the different risk types.
‒ Strategic investments. The nontrading market risk economic capital usage increased mainly by mark-to-market
valuation of investments within this portfolio.
‒ Alternative assets. The nontrading market risk economic capital decreased significantly during 2016 mainly due to
the sale of Hua Xia Bank Company Limited and Maher Terminals USA. Further decreases were driven by de-risking
initiatives in the Non-Core Operations Unit.
‒ Other nontrading market risks:
‒ Interest rate risk. In addition to the allocation of economic capital to outright interest rate risk in the nontrading
market risk portfolio, a main component in this category is the maturity transformation of contractually short term
deposits. The effective duration of contractually short term deposits is based upon observable client behavior,
elasticity of deposit rates to market interest rates (“DRE”) and the volatility of deposit balances. Economic capital
is derived by stressing modeling assumptions in particular the DRE – for the effective duration of overnight de-
posits. Behavioral and economic characteristics are taken into account when calculating the effective duration
and optional exposures from our mortgage businesses. In total the economic capital usage for December 31,
2016 was € 1,921 million, compared to € 2,057 million for December 31, 2015. The decrease in economic capital
contribution was driven by methodology enhancements with regard to modeling of non-maturity deposit partially
offset by an increase in basis risks.
‒ Credit spread risk. Economic capital charge for portfolios in the banking book subject to material credit spread
risk. Economic capital usage was € 1,419 million as of December 31, 2016, versus € 1,654 million as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015. The decrease in economic capital usage was driven by reduced spread risk of securities held by
Treasury as liquidity reserve partially offset by enhanced capture of credit spread risks in banking book positions
in Global Markets.
‒ Equity compensation risk. The risk arises from a structural short position in our own share price arising from re-
stricted equity units. The economic capital usage was € 582 million as of December 31, 2016, compared with
€ 405 million as of December 31, 2015, predominately driven by an increase in restricted equity units.
‒ Pension risk. This risk arises from our defined benefit obligations, including interest rate risk and inflation risk,
credit spread risk, equity risk and longevity risk. The economic capital usage was € 1,007 million and
€ 828 million as of December 31, 2016 and December 31, 2015 respectively. The increase is mainly caused by
increased credit spread risk from the pension liability due to convexity effects following a decline in market rates.
Annual Report 2016
‒ Structural foreign exchange risk. Our foreign exchange exposure arises from unhedged capital and retained
earnings in non-euro currencies in certain subsidiaries. Our economic capital usage was € 2,485 million as of
December 31, 2016 on a diversified basis versus € 3,183 million as of December 31, 2015. The decrease is
largely caused by reduced shareholders equity position in foreign currency including the sale of Hua Xia Bank
Company Limited.
‒ Guaranteed funds risk. Economic capital usage as of December 31, 2016 was materially unchanged at
€ 1,699 million compared to € 1,655 million as of December 31, 2015.
Operational Risk Exposure

Operational Risk – Risk Profile
Operational Risk Losses by Event Type (Profit and Loss view)
in € m. 2016 2015 1
Clients, Products and Business Practices 2,566 3,346
Internal Fraud 396 2,176
External Fraud 18 (197)
Execution, Delivery and Process Management 160 381
Others 23 20
Group 3,163 5,726
1 Changed 2015 loss figures due to subsequent capture of losses and reclassification.
As of December 2016, profit and loss based operational losses decreased by € 2.6 billion or 45 % compared to year-
end 2015. The decrease was driven by the event types “Clients, Products and Business Practices” and “Internal Fraud”,
due to settlements reached and increased litigation reserves for unsettled cases in 2015.
1
Operational Losses by Event Type occurred in the period 2016 (2011-2015)
Frequency of Operational Losses (first posting date) Distribution of Operational Losses (posting date)
2% (2%) 5% (4%)
Others Execution, Delivery
and Process Mgmt
1% (1%)
Others
10% (13%) 43% (28%) 1% (-1%)

Execution, Delivery Clients, Products and External Fraud
and Process Mgmt Business Practices
13% (31%) 81% (65%)

Internal Fraud Clients, Products and
Business Practices
44% (56%)
External Fraud
<1% (<1%)
Internal Fraud
1 Percentages in brackets correspond to loss frequency respectively to loss amount for losses occurred in 2011-2015 period. Frequency and amounts can change
subsequently.
The above left chart “Frequency of Operational Losses” summarizes operational risk events which occurred in 2016
compared to the five-year period 2011-2015 in brackets based on the period in which a loss was first recognized for
that event. For example, for a loss event that was first recognized in 2002 with an additional profit/loss event recog-
nized in 2016, the frequency chart would not include the loss event, but the loss distribution chart would include the
profit/loss recognized in the respective period.
Frequencies are driven by the event types “External Fraud” with a frequency of 44 % and the event type “Clients,
Product and Business Practices” with 43 % of all observed loss events. “Execution, Delivery and Process Management”
Employees – 252
contributes 10 %. Others are stable at 2 %. The event type “Internal Fraud” has a low frequency, resulting in less than
1 % of the loss events in the period 2016. This is unchanged compared to 2011-2015.
The above right chart “Distribution of Operational Losses” summarizes operational risk loss postings recognized in the
profit/loss in 2016 compared to the five-year period 2011-2015. The event type “Clients, Product and Business Prac-
tices” dominates the operational loss distribution with a share of 81 % and is determined by outflows related to litigation,
investigations and enforcement actions. “Internal Fraud” has the second highest share (13 %) which is related to regu-
latory events we have experienced in recent years. Finally, the event types “Execution, Delivery and Process Man-
agement” (5 %), “Others” (1 %) and “External Fraud” (1 %) can be considered minor, compared to other event types.
Liquidity Risk Exposure

Funding Markets and Capital Markets Issuance
Credit markets in 2016 were affected by continued political uncertainties, the ongoing low interest rate environment as
well as the implementation in a number of jurisdictions, including Germany, of measures regarding the insolvency
hierarchy of senior liabilities. Our 5 year CDS traded within a range of 98 to 267 basis points, peaking in February.
Since then, the spread has declined significantly and as of year-end was trading at 175 bp, in the middle of the range
for the year. The spreads on our bonds exhibited similar volatility. For example, our 1.25 % EUR benchmark maturing
in September 2021 traded in a range of 80 to 189 basis points, closing at the lower end of the range at year end.
Our 2016 funding plan of up to € 30 billion, comprising debt issuance with an original maturity in excess of one year,
was fully completed and we concluded 2016 having raised € 31.8 billion in term funding. This funding was broadly
spread across the following funding sources: unsecured benchmark issuance (€ 13 billion), Tier 2 benchmark issuance
(€ 0.8 billion), covered benchmark issuance (€ 3.3 billion), unsecured plain vanilla private placements (€ 8.0 billion) and
other unsecured structured and covered private placements (€ 6.7 billion). The € 31.8 billion total was evenly split
between Euro (€ 15.2 billion) and US dollar (€ 15.1 billion) with smaller amounts in JPY and CHF. In addition to direct
issuance, we use long-term cross currency swaps to manage our funding needs outside of EUR. Our investor base for
2016 issuances comprised retail customers (19 %), banks (12 %), asset managers and pension funds (39 %), insur-
ance companies (11 %) and other institutional investors (19 %). The geographical distribution was split between Ger-
many (30 %), rest of Europe (25 %), US (28 %), Asia/Pacific (15 %) and Other (2 %). Of our total capital markets
issuance outstanding as of December 31, 2016, approximately 84 % was issued on an unsecured basis.
The average spread of our issuance over 3-months-Euribor (all non-Euro funding spreads are rebased versus 3-
months Euribor) was 129 basis points for the full year with an average tenor of 6.7 years. Our issuance activities were
slightly higher in the first half of the year with volumes decreasing in the second half of the year 2016. We issued the
following volumes over each quarter: € 9.1 billion, € 11.1 billion, € 2.8 billion and € 8.8 billion, respectively.
In 2017, our funding plan is € 25 billion which we plan to cover by accessing the above sources, without being overly
dependent on any one source. We also plan to raise a portion of this funding in U.S. dollar and may enter into cross
currency swaps to manage any residual requirements. We have total capital markets maturities, excluding legally
exercisable calls of approximately € 21.5 billion in 2017.
Funding Diversification
In 2016, total external funding remained constant at € 977 billion versus € 976 billion at December 31, 2015. Retail
deposits declined by € 19.6 billion (6 %) predominantly reflecting a loss of wealth management client balances in the
second half of the year. Transaction banking balances increased by € 3.3 billion (2 %) while unsecured wholesale
funding reduced by € 5.4 billion (9 %). Other customers reduced by € 28.1 billion (35 %) primarily driven by a reduction
in net prime brokerage payables of € 20 billion. Secured funding and shorts increased by € 54.9 billion (50 %) driven by
increased repo financing in addition to a net increase in TLTRO funding of € 14 billion. This was reflected in the in-
crease in the cash component of € 80 billion in the Liquidity Reserves.
Annual Report 2016
The overall proportion of our most stable funding sources (comprising capital markets and equity, retail, and transaction
banking) slightly decreased from 74 % to 72 %.
Composition of External Funding Sources

In € bn.
312
300 292
225
212 210
197 200
165
150
110
75 81
53 60 55
0 4 2
22% 21% 32% 30% 20% 20% 8% 5% 6% 6% 11% 17% 0% 0%
Capital Markets Retail Transaction Other Unsecured Secured Funding Financing
and Equity Banking Customers1 Wholesale and Shorts Vehicles2
December 31, 2015: total € 976 billion

December 31, 2016: total € 977 billion
1Other includes fiduciary, self-funding structures (e.g. X-markets), margin/Prime Brokerage cash balances (shown on a net basis).
2Includes ABCP-Conduits.
Reference: Reconciliation to total balance sheet: Derivatives & settlement balances € 504 billion (€ 528 billion), add-back for netting effect for Margin & Prime
Brokerage cash balances (shown on a net basis) € 68 billion (€ 71 billion), other non-funding liabilities € 42 billion (€ 54 billion) for December 31, 2016
and December 31, 2015 respectively; figures may not add up due to rounding.
1
Maturity of unsecured wholesale funding, ABCP and capital markets issuance
Dec 31, 2016
Over Over Over Over
1 month 3 months 6 months 1 year
Not more but not but not but not Sub-total but not
than more than more than more than less than more than Over
in € m. 1 month 3 months 6 months 1 year 1 year 2 years 2 years Total
Deposits from banks 15,626 5,294 6,961 1,588 29,469 40 659 30,168
Deposits from other
wholesale customers 4,164 5,712 3,992 4,111 17,979 703 422 19,104
CDs and CP 1,117 1,379 1,973 1,060 5,529 4 1 5,534
ABCP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Senior unsecured
plain vanilla 2 626 4,111 4,735 11,825 21,296 8,085 49,993 79,374
Senior unsecured
structured notes 2 430 696 858 1,715 3,698 3,578 20,217 27,494
Covered bonds/ABS 0 482 678 1,284 2,445 2,718 18,601 23,764
Subordinated liabilities 0 8 1,576 972 2,556 4,620 11,712 18,887
Other 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 21,963 17,682 20,773 22,555 82,973 19,749 101,605 204,326
thereof:
Secured 0 482 678 1,284 2,445 2,718 18,601 23,764
Unsecured 21,963 17,199 20,094 21,271 80,528 17,031 83,004 180,563
1 Includes additional Tier 1 notes reported as additional equity components in the financial statements. Liabilities with call features are shown at earliest legally
exercisable call date. No assumption is made as to whether such calls would be exercised.
2 Split between vanilla and structured notes has been aligned with TLAC definitions, 2015 numbers have been restated accordingly.
Employees – 252
The total volume of unsecured wholesale liabilities, ABCP and capital markets issuance maturing within one year
amount to € 83 billion as of December 31, 2016, and should be viewed in the context of our total Liquidity Reserves of
€ 219 billion.
Dec 31, 2015

Over Over Over Over
1 month 3 months 6 months 1 year
Not more but not but not but not Sub-total but not
than more than more than more than less than more than Over
in € m. 1 month 3 months 6 months 1 year 1 year 2 years 2 years Total
Deposits from banks 11,101 8,073 3,196 1,399 23,769 143 69 23,981
Deposits from other
wholesale customers 2,872 8,911 5,090 4,078 20,950 319 191 21,460
CDs and CP 1,216 3,718 3,984 5,636 14,555 298 1 14,853
ABCP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Senior unsecured
plain vanilla 1 2,598 6,320 2,249 3,079 14,246 17,175 38,659 70,081
Senior unsecured
structured notes 1 708 2,376 2,214 3,371 8,669 5,365 23,446 37,480
Covered bonds/ABS 0 51 1,371 75 1,496 2,460 18,056 22,012
Subordinated liabilities 734 680 263 310 1,987 1,376 16,199 19,562
Other 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 19,229 30,129 18,367 17,948 85,673 27,136 96,621 209,430
thereof:
Secured 0 51 1,371 75 1,496 2,460 18,056 22,012
Unsecured 19,229 30,078 16,996 17,873 84,176 24,677 78,565 187,418
The following table shows the currency breakdown of our short-term unsecured wholesale funding, of our ABCP fund-
ing and of our capital markets issuance.
Unsecured wholesale funding, ABCP and capital markets issuance (currency breakdown)
Dec 31,2016 Dec 31,2015
in other in other
in € m. in EUR in USD in GBP CCYs Total in EUR in USD in GBP CCYs Total
Deposits from
banks 3,554 22,122 3,649 843 30,168 4,875 17,066 1,053 987 23,981
Deposits from
other whole-
sale customers 15,396 2,964 541 203 19,104 15,912 4,257 476 815 21,460
CDs and CP 4,456 259 259 560 5,534 10,771 1,202 1,843 1,038 14,853
ABCP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Senior unsecured
plain vanilla 1 39,510 33,504 8 6,352 79,374 42,403 22,145 110 5,422 70,081
Senior unsecured
structured notes 1 11,037 12,697 133 3,626 27,494 15,515 17,750 176 4,039 37,480
Covered bonds/
ABS 23,745 16 0 2 23,764 21,952 60 0 0 22,012
Subordinated
liabilities 8,540 9,196 799 353 18,887 8,507 9,858 800 397 19,562
Other 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Total 106,239 80,758 5,390 11,940 204,326 119,935 72,338 4,459 12,698 209,430
thereof:
Secured 23,745 16 0 2 23,764 21,952 60 0 0 22,012
Unsecured 82,494 80,742 5,390 11,938 180,563 97,984 72,278 4,459 12,697 187,418
Annual Report 2016
Liquidity Reserves
Composition of our liquidity reserves by parent company (including branches) and subsidiaries
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
in € bn. Carrying Value Liquidity Value Carrying Value Liquidity Value
Available cash and cash equivalents (held primarily at central banks) 178 178 98 98
Parent (incl. foreign branches) 136 136 75 75
Subsidiaries 42 42 23 23
Highly liquid securities (includes government, government
guaranteed and agency securities) 27 25 100 94
Other unencumbered central bank eligible securities 14 9 17 13
Total liquidity reserves 219 212 215 205
As of December 31, 2016, our liquidity reserves amounted to € 219 billion compared with € 215 billion as of Decem-
ber 31, 2015. Although the net growth in Liquidity Reserves was only € 3 billion, the cash and cash equivalents in-
creased by € 80 billion, while the unencumbered securities decreased by € 76 billion. This was largely driven by actions
taken during the year to increase secured funding outstandings, as well as more general reductions in business inven-
tory in particular during the last quarter of 2016. This was considered a prudent short-term measure in light of a chal-
lenging environment for the Group during this time. Our average liquidity reserves during the year were € 212.4 billion
compared with € 202.2 billion during 2015. In the table above the carrying value represents the market value of our
liquidity reserves while the liquidity value reflects our assumption of the value that could be obtained, primarily through
secured funding, taking into account the experience observed in secured funding markets at times of stress.
The liquidity value (weighted) of our Liquidity Reserves of € 212 billion exceeds the liquidity value (weighted) of our
High Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) of € 203 billion. The major drivers of this difference are that Liquidity Reserves
include central bank eligible but otherwise less liquid securities (for example traded loans, other investment grade
corporate bonds and ABS) which are not recognized in HQLA and that HQLA includes major index equities, but ex-
cludes cash balances deposited with central banks to satisfy a minimum cash requirements as well as cash balances
deposited with non EU Central Banks rated below AA- which are included in the LCR but not as part of the HQLA.
Liquidity Coverage Ratio

Our LCR of 128 % as of December 31, 2016 has been calculated in accordance with the Commission Delegated
Regulation (EU) 2015/61 and the EBA’s Implementing Technical Standard on Supervisory Reporting with regard to
the LCR.
LCR components
Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Liquidity Value Liquidity Value
in € bn. (weighted) (weighted)
High quality liquid assets 201 192
Gross inflows 93 111
Gross outflows 250 272
Net outflows 158 161
LCR ratio in % 128 % 119 %
Employees – 252
Funding Risk Management

Structural Funding
All funding matrices (the aggregate currency, the U.S. dollar and the GBP funding matrix) were in line with the respec-
tive risk appetite as of year ends 2016 and 2015.
Stress Testing and Scenario Analysis

During 2016, in particular in the late autumn following market speculation on our negotiation with the U.S. Department
of Justice in relation to our issuance and underwriting of residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS), negative
client responses adversely impacted our liquidity and funding position, and our internal measures of available liquidity
over the duration of a stressed situation indicated a need to take corrective action. We responded with actions de-
signed to restore these measures to customary levels and remained in contact with our regulators.
Global All Currency Monthly Stress Testing Results

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015 1
Funding Gap Net Liquidity Funding Gap Net Liquidity
in € bn. Gap 2 Closure 3 Position 4 Gap 2 Closure 3 Position 4
Systemic market risk 64 204 141 71 218 147
Emerging markets 10 190 180 14 190 176
1 notch downgrade (DB specific) 43 195 152 51 200 148
Severe downgrade (DB specific) 178 224 46 188 240 53
Combined 4 206 242 36 218 264 46
1 Funding gap caused by impaired rollover of liabilities and other projected outflows.
2 Based on liquidity generation through Liquidity Reserves and other countermeasures.
3 All scenarios showing 8 week point.
4 Combined impact of systemic market risk and severe downgrade.
Global USD Monthly Stress Testing Results

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Funding Gap Net Liquidity Funding Gap Net Liquidity
in € bn. Gap 1 Closure 2 Position 3 Gap 1 Closure 2 Position 3
Combined 4 94 164 69 102 163 61
Global GBP Monthly Stress Testing Results

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
Net Liquidity Funding Gap Net Liquidity
1 2 3
in € bn. Funding Gap Gap Closure Position Gap Closure Position
4
Combined 10 20 10 10 32 22
The following table presents the amount of additional collateral required in the event of a one- or two-notch downgrade
by rating agencies for all currencies.
Additional Contractual Obligations

Dec 31, 2016 Dec 31, 2015
One-notch Two-notch One-notch Two-notch
in € m. downgrade downgrade downgrade downgrade
Contractual derivatives funding or margin requirements 1,470 1,982 4,332 6,472
Other contractual funding or margin requirements 317 1,459 317 1,459
Annual Report 2016
Asset Encumbrance
This section refers to asset encumbrance in the group of institutions consolidated for banking regulatory purposes
pursuant to the German Banking Act. Thereunder not included are insurance companies or companies outside the
finance sector. Assets pledged by our insurance subsidiaries are included in Note 23 “Assets Pledged and Received as
Collateral” of the consolidated financial statements, and restricted assets held to satisfy obligations to insurance com-
panies’ policy holders are included within Note 40 “Information on Subsidiaries” of the consolidated financial statements.
Encumbered assets primarily comprise those on- and off-balance sheet assets that are pledged as collateral against
secured funding, collateral swaps, and other collateralized obligations. Additionally, in line with the EBA technical stan-
dards on regulatory asset encumbrance reporting, we consider assets placed with settlement systems, including de-
fault funds and initial margins as encumbered, as well as other assets pledged which cannot be freely withdrawn such
as mandatory minimum reserves at central banks. We also include derivative margin receivable assets as encumbered
under these EBA guidelines.
Readily available assets are those on- and off-balance sheet assets that are not otherwise encumbered, and which are
in freely transferrable form. Unencumbered financial assets at fair value, other than securities borrowed or purchased
under resale agreements and positive market value from derivatives, and available for sale investments are all as-
sumed to be readily available.
The readily available value represents the current balance sheet carrying value rather than any form of stressed liquid-
ity value (see the “Liquidity Reserves” for an analysis of unencumbered liquid assets available under a liquidity stress
scenario). Other unencumbered on- and off-balance sheet assets are those assets that have not been pledged as
collateral against secured funding or other collateralized obligations, or are otherwise not considered to be ready avail-
able. Included in this category are securities borrowed or purchased under resale agreements and positive market
value from derivatives. Similarly, for loans and other advances to customers, these would only be viewed as readily
available to the extent they are already in a pre-packaged transferrable format, and have not already been used to
generate funding. This represents the most conservative view given that an element of such loans currently shown in
other could be packaged into a format that would be suitable for use to generate funding.
Encumbered and unencumbered assets

Dec 31, 2016
Carrying value
Unencumbered assets
in € bn. Encumbered Readily
(unless stated otherwise) Assets assets available Other
Debt securities 151 57 94 0
Equity instruments 75 42 33 0
Other assets:
Cash and due from banks & Interest earning deposits with Banks 191 12 179 0
Securities borrowed or purchased under resale agreements 1 36 0 0 36
Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss 2
Trading assets 14 0 14 0
Positive market value from derivative financial instruments 488 0 0 488
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 7 0 7 0
Financial assets available for sale 2 3 0 3 0
Loans 419 72 17 329
Other assets 139 55 0 84
Total 1,591 239 347 1,005
1 Securities borrowed and securities purchased under resale agreements are all shown as other unencumbered. The use of the underlying collateral is separately
captured in the off-balance sheet table below.
2 Excludes Debt securities and Equity instruments (separately disclosed above).
Employees – 252
Dec 31, 2016

Fair value of collateral received
Unencumbered assets
Collateral received: 260 218 43 0
Other collateral received 0 0 0 0
Dec 31, 2015

Carrying value
Unencumbered assets
Other assets:
Cash and due from banks & Interest earning deposits with Banks 107 11 96 0
Financial assets at fair value through profit and loss 2
Trading assets 17 0 17 0
Positive market value from derivative financial instruments 518 0 0 518
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss 12 0 12 0
Financial assets available for sale 2 3 0 3 0
Loans 424 45 11 368
Other assets 132 59 0 74
Total 1,632 238 307 1,087
1 Securities borrowed and securities purchased under resale agreements are all shown as other unencumbered. The use of the underlying collateral is separately
captured in the off-balance sheet table below.
2 Excludes Debt securities and Equity instruments (separately disclosed above).
Dec 31, 2015

Fair value of collateral received
Unencumbered assets
Collateral received: 285 238 46 1
Other collateral received 1 0 0 1
The above tables set out a breakdown of on- and off-balance sheet items, broken down between encumbered, readily
available and other. Any securities borrowed or purchased under resale agreements are shown based on the fair value
of collateral received.
The above tables of encumbered assets include assets that are not encumbered at an individual entity level, but which
may be subject to restrictions in terms of their transferability within the group. Such restrictions may be due to local
connected lending requirements or similar regulatory restrictions. In this situation it is not feasible to identify individual
balance sheet items that cannot be transferred.
Annual Report 2016
Maturity Analysis of Assets and Financial Liabilities

Treasury manages the maturity analysis of assets and liabilities. Modeling of assets and liabilities is necessary in cases
where the contractual maturity does not adequately reflect the liquidity risk position. The most significant example in
this context would be immediately repayable deposits from retail and transaction banking customers which have con-
sistently displayed high stability throughout even the most severe financial crises.
The modeling profiles are part of the overall liquidity risk management framework (see section “Liquidity Stress Testing
and Scenario Analysis” for short-term liquidity positions ≤ 1 year and section “Structural Funding” for long-term liquidity
positions > 1 year) which is defined and approved by the Management Board.
The following tables present a maturity analysis of our total assets based on carrying value and upon earliest legally
exercisable maturity as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively.
Employees – 252
Analysis of the earliest contractual maturity of assets

Dec 31, 2016
On
demand Over Over Over Over Over Over
(incl. 1 month 3 months 6 months 9 months 1 year 2 years
Overnight to no but no but no but no but no but no
and Up to more more more more more more
one day one than than than than than than Over
in € m. notice) month 3 months 6 months 9 months 1 year 2 years 5 years 5 years Total
Cash and central bank balances 177,648 539 131 121 334 2,591 0 0 0 181,364
Interbank balances
(w/o central banks) 5,841 3,578 596 83 65 834 115 26 469 11,606
Central bank funds sold 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Securities purchased under resale
agreements 631 4,204 5,852 3,170 1,368 532 449 15 67 16,287
With banks 604 2,534 5,026 2,077 1,217 461 0 0 0 11,918
With customers 27 1,670 826 1,093 152 71 449 15 67 4,370
Securities borrowed 19,548 532 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 20,081
With banks 2,459 52 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2,511
With customers 17,089 480 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 17,570
Financial assets at fair value
through profit or loss – trading 677,696 33,314 9,577 1,752 776 1,983 2,995 2,803 12,884 743,781
Trading assets 171,044 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 171,044
Fixed-income securities and
loans 94,486 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 94,486
Equities and other variable-
income securities 75,633 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 75,633
Other trading assets 924 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 924
Positive market values from
derivative financial instruments 485,150 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 485,150
Financial assets designated at fair
value through profit or loss 21,502 33,314 9,577 1,752 776 1,983 2,995 2,803 12,884 87,587
Securities purchased under
resale agreements 7,154 28,691 6,810 914 110 1,256 995 608 866 47,404
Securities borrowed 14,227 4,561 2,348 0 0 0 0 0 0 21,136
loans 120 62 419 838 666 232 1,992 2,195 11,399 17,923
income securities 0 0 0 0 0 146 0 0 590 736
Other financial assets
designated at fair value through
profit or loss 1 0 0 0 0 350 7 0 29 387
derivative financial instruments
qualifying for hedge accounting 0 61 201 39 52 30 257 1,030 1,846 3,516
Financial assets available for sale 471 1,154 2,344 1,031 1,915 2,298 9,210 18,778 19,028 56,228
Fixed-income securities and loans 251 1,008 2,341 1,031 1,915 1,334 9,210 18,733 18,452 54,275
income securities 219 146 3 0 0 964 0 45 575 1,953
Loans 18,364 23,666 26,185 29,223 9,128 9,107 28,787 66,383 198,067 408,909
To banks 937 1,978 3,043 2,425 650 641 1,529 1,298 775 13,276
To customers 17,427 21,688 23,142 26,798 8,477 8,467 27,258 65,085 197,292 395,633
Retail 6,446 3,872 5,436 2,397 1,630 2,055 5,634 17,450 157,616 202,536
Corporates and other customers 10,980 17,816 17,706 24,401 6,847 6,412 21,624 47,635 39,676 193,097
Securities held to maturity 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,515 1,691 3,206
Other financial assets 104,400 475 1,052 221 240 135 58 671 2,878 110,131
Total financial assets 1,004,599 67,523 45,937 35,640 13,878 17,510 41,870 91,221 236,931 1,555,109
Other assets 23,492 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 11,944 35,437
Total assets 1,028,091 67,523 45,937 35,640 13,878 17,510 41,870 91,221 248,875 1,590,546
Annual Report 2016
Analysis of the earliest contractual maturity of assets

Dec 31, 2015
On
demand Over Over Over Over Over Over
(incl. 1 month 3 months 6 months 9 months 1 year 2 years
Overnight to no but no but no but no but no but no
and Up to more more more more more more
Cash and central bank balances 94,290 337 0 0 0 2,313 0 0 0 96,940
Interbank balances
(w/o central banks) 7,703 2,115 434 341 1 2,025 83 100 40 12,842
Central bank funds sold 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Securities purchased under resale
agreements 450 8,293 5,530 4,539 1,861 568 888 328 0 22,456
With banks 426 7,050 5,091 3,648 1,601 311 647 0 0 18,773
With customers 24 1,243 440 890 260 258 241 328 0 3,683
Securities borrowed 30,335 3,221 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 33,557
With banks 3,462 159 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3,622
With customers 26,873 3,062 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 29,935
Financial assets at fair value
through profit or loss – trading 735,748 35,190 6,176 3,652 1,318 1,298 5,173 6,599 25,727 820,883
Trading assets 196,035 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 196,035
loans 118,671 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 118,671
income securities 76,044 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 76,044
Other trading assets 1,320 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,320
Financial assets designated at fair
value through profit or loss 24,119 35,190 6,176 3,652 1,318 1,298 5,173 6,599 25,727 109,253
Securities purchased under
resale agreements 6,139 31,257 5,449 2,344 503 341 1,690 2,384 965 51,073
Securities borrowed 17,898 3,544 47 0 0 0 0 0 0 21,489
loans 79 376 656 1,303 791 448 3,483 4,214 14,532 25,883
income securities 0 4 0 0 0 155 0 0 10,230 10,389
Other financial assets
profit or loss 2 9 24 5 24 354 0 1 0 419
qualifying for hedge accounting 0 9 71 75 139 58 142 716 1,925 3,136
Financial assets available for sale 18 966 1,941 1,543 893 1,998 8,832 22,880 34,513 73,583
Fixed-income securities and loans 6 481 1,937 1,543 893 952 8,815 22,869 33,873 71,368
income securities 12 485 3 0 0 1,046 17 12 640 2,215
Loans 20,375 31,464 27,851 30,337 9,142 11,313 24,272 71,890 201,104 427,749
To banks 543 2,137 3,829 1,858 1,703 870 726 1,592 926 14,183
To customers 19,832 29,327 24,022 28,480 7,439 10,442 23,546 70,299 200,177 413,565
Retail 5,363 6,048 6,102 3,065 2,536 2,874 6,743 18,787 149,127 200,646
Other financial assets 94,078 932 1,479 564 254 1,003 115 62 66 98,555
Total financial assets 982,997 82,528 43,483 41,051 13,608 20,577 39,505 102,576 263,374 1,589,700
Other assets 26,341 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 13,089 39,430
Total assets 1,009,338 82,528 43,483 41,051 13,608 20,577 39,505 102,576 276,463 1,629,130
The following tables present a maturity analysis of our total liabilities based on carrying value and upon earliest legally
exercisable maturity as of December 31, 2016 and 2015, respectively.
Employees – 252
Analysis of the earliest contractual maturity of liabilities

Dec 31, 2016
On Over Over Over Over Over Over
demand 1 month 3 months 6 months 9 months 1 year 2 years
(incl. Over- to no but no but no but no but no but no
night and Up to more more more more more more
Deposits 329,776 36,590 110,606 17,562 15,756 12,595 8,532 8,041 10,746 550,204
Due to banks 64,438 9,602 13,129 2,279 6,175 4,220 1,885 5,372 8,993 116,094
Due to customers 265,337 26,988 97,477 15,283 9,581 8,375 6,647 2,669 1,752 434,110
Retail 109,943 10,761 75,517 3,191 1,744 902 785 911 279 204,033
Trading liabilities 520,887 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 520,887
Trading securities 56,592 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 56,592
Other trading liabilities 437 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 437
Negative market values from
Financial liabilities designed at fair
value through profit or loss (without
loan commitments and financial
guarantees) 1,992 38,633 8,123 2,212 744 3,745 1,031 1,004 2,969 60,452
Securities sold under repurchase
agreements 1,587 36,128 7,584 1,791 2 2,739 566 0 0 50,397
Long-term debt 201 73 329 384 640 859 398 949 2,640 6,473
Other financial liabilities
profit or loss 203 2,432 210 37 102 147 68 55 329 3,582
Investment contract liabilities 0 0 0 0 0 592 0 0 0 592
qualifying for hedge accounting 0 249 324 194 312 231 943 1,484 856 4,593
Central bank funds purchased 353 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 353
agreements 19,957 1,510 844 1,191 0 1,178 434 271 0 25,387
Due to banks 14,934 1,510 844 1,191 0 1,178 292 271 0 20,222
Due to customers 5,023 0 0 0 0 0 142 0 0 5,165
Securities loaned 3,587 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 3,598
Due to banks 1,488 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1,492
Due to customers 2,099 6 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2,106
Other short term borrowings 13,216 921 1,073 265 1,292 529 0 0 0 17,295
Long-term debt 0 1,037 5,275 8,143 10,113 4,190 43,315 56,444 43,799 172,316
Debt securities - senior 0 989 5,085 7,476 9,772 3,534 13,284 51,704 30,162 122,006
Debt securities - subordinated 0 0 0 0 0 231 140 1,124 5,293 6,788
Other long-term debt - senior 0 43 190 582 284 384 29,507 3,496 8,063 42,549
Other long-term debt -
subordinated 0 5 0 85 56 42 384 120 281 974
Trust Preferred Securities 0 0 0 730 1,054 413 4,176 0 0 6,373
Other financial liabilities 128,398 976 1,665 221 201 161 295 112 3,246 135,274
Total financial liabilities 1,018,165 79,926 127,911 30,518 29,473 23,635 58,726 67,356 61,616 1,497,325
Other liabilities 28,362 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28,362
Total equity 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 64,819 64,819
Total liabilities and equity 1,046,527 79,926 127,911 30,518 29,473 23,635 58,726 67,356 126,435 1,590,506
Off-balance sheet commitments
given 6,061 9,569 8,896 13,765 8,708 14,794 30,609 98,024 27,978 218,404
Banks 305 688 1,501 1,671 602 587 1,185 958 192 7,688
Retail 253 124 95 226 283 387 757 538 8,875 11,540
Annual Report 2016
Analysis of the earliest contractual maturity of liabilities

Dec 31, 2015
On Over Over Over Over Over Over
demand 1 month 3 months 6 months 9 months 1 year 2 years
(incl. Over- to no but no but no but no but no but no
night and Up to more more more more more more
Deposits 345,569 37,777 117,943 21,500 10,169 8,600 7,356 6,935 11,126 566,974
Due to banks 72,304 5,131 15,770 5,884 1,616 2,106 2,188 5,214 8,852 119,065
Due to customers 273,265 32,646 102,173 15,616 8,552 6,494 5,168 1,721 2,273 447,909
Retail 113,016 13,588 80,124 3,270 2,131 1,805 2,524 642 220 217,321
Trading liabilities 546,381 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 546,381
Trading securities 51,327 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 51,327
Other trading liabilities 977 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 977
Financial liabilities designed at fair
value through profit or loss (without
loan commitments and financial
guarantees) 18,423 4,725 1,569 1,760 1,240 10,069 1,809 1,652 3,526 44,773
agreements 17,600 2,712 690 1,172 140 9,322 0 0 0 31,637
Long-term debt 269 47 342 426 879 513 1,669 1,384 3,183 8,710
Other financial liabilities
profit or loss 554 1,966 537 162 221 233 141 268 343 4,425
Investment contract liabilities 0 35 70 70 70 734 108 1,593 5,843 8,522
qualifying for hedge accounting 0 43 513 414 203 301 278 1,630 2,983 6,365
Central bank funds purchased 574 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 574
agreements 7,492 1,567 53 117 0 0 0 0 0 9,229
Due to banks 2,757 1,554 53 117 0 0 0 0 0 4,481
Due to customers 4,734 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4,747
Securities loaned 2,846 10 1 0 0 0 0 0 414 3,270
Due to banks 290 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 295
Due to customers 2,556 5 1 0 0 0 0 0 414 2,975
Other short term borrowings 17,776 1,311 2,052 2,666 3,006 1,199 0 0 0 28,010
Long-term debt 0 3,327 8,638 6,923 4,251 2,990 39,801 45,435 48,652 160,016
Debt securities - senior 0 3,184 8,444 5,815 3,782 2,631 24,701 40,061 36,599 125,217
Debt securities - subordinated 0 0 0 619 150 100 0 1,314 4,231 6,414
Other long-term debt - senior 0 143 194 247 173 162 14,978 3,575 7,502 26,973
Other long-term debt -
subordinated 0 0 0 243 146 97 121 486 319 1,412
Trust Preferred Securities 0 733 0 262 0 0 735 4,373 918 7,020
Other financial liabilities 146,678 931 2,859 198 83 170 340 14 36 151,309
Total financial liabilities 1,085,739 50,458 133,696 33,911 19,023 24,063 50,426 61,633 73,496 1,532,443
Other liabilities 28,984 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 28,984
Total equity 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 67,624 67,624
Total liabilities and equity 1,114,722 50,458 133,696 33,911 19,023 24,063 50,426 61,633 141,120 1,629,051
Off-balance sheet commitments
given 6,433 9,833 8,772 17,963 10,036 14,221 29,240 107,376 27,999 231,874
Banks 425 406 1,405 2,354 1,301 1,059 1,512 1,213 177 9,852
Retail 231 166 103 687 678 945 2,272 1,605 7,272 13,958

RIMS Exploring Risk Appetite Risk Tolerance 0412

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RIMS Exploring Risk Appetite Risk Tolerance 0412

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RIMS Exploring Risk Appetite Risk Tolerance 0412

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Risk Report

Disclosures according to Pillar 3 of the Basel 3 Capital Framework

Disclosures according to principles and recommendations of the Enhanced

Risk and Capital Overview

Key Risk Metrics

Common Equity Tier 1 Ratio Total Risk-Weighted Assets

Internal Capital Adequacy Ratio 1 Total Economic Capital

Leverage Ratio Leverage Exposure

Liquidity Coverage Ratio Stressed Net Liquidity Position (sNLP)

Overall Risk Assessment

Overall risk position as measured by economic capital usage by risk type

Risk profile of our business divisions as measured by economic capital

Dec 31, 20151

Risk and Capital Framework

Risk Management Principles and Governance

Several layers of management provide cohesive risk governance:

Risk Management Governance Structure of the Deutsche Bank Group

Audit Committee Risk Committee Integrity Committee

Group Risk Committee

Enterprise Risk Committee Liquidity Management Non-Financial Risk Group Reputational

The key risk management committees of Postbank are:

‒ Risk is taken within a defined risk appetite;

‒ Being fully responsible for our risks;

Risk Appetite and Capacity

Risk and Capital Plan

‒ Balanced risk adjusted performance across business areas and units;

The Strategic and Capital Planning process allows us to:

Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process

Stress Testing Framework of Deutsche Bank Group

Risk Reporting and Measurement Systems

Recovery and Resolution Planning

MREL and TLAC

Risk and Capital Management

Resource Limit Setting

Risk Identification and Assessment

Credit Risk Management

Measuring Credit Risk

Managing and Mitigation of Credit Risk

Mitigation of Credit Risk on Counterparty Level

We segregate collateral received into the following two types:

Concentrations within Credit Risk Mitigation

Managing Credit Risk on Portfolio Level

Industry Risk Management

Country Risk Management

Product specific Risk Management

Market Risk Management

We distinguish between three substantially different types of market risk:

Market Risk Measurement

Trading Market Risk

Internally developed Market Risk Models

Incremental Risk Charge

Comprehensive Risk Measure

Market Risk Standardized Approach

Market Risk Stress Testing

Trading Market Risk Economic Capital (TMR EC)

Traded Default Risk Economic Capital (TDR EC)

Trading Market Risk Reporting

Regulatory prudent valuation of assets carried at fair value